JP2015077311A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance the interest in a game.SOLUTION: Performance execution means includes operation performance execution means which executes an operation performance executing a performance based on an operation similar to a switch operation. Switch setting means invalidates a switch operation at least during a period in which the operation performance execution means accepts an operation in a variable display in which an operation performance is executed. Moreover, the switch setting means varies a probability of executing a setting of validating the switch operation on the basis of a state.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are given to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be controllable to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit).

  In addition, a gaming machine having a plurality of backgrounds has been proposed as an effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, it may be possible to shift from a certain background to another background by the player's operation.

JP 2013-94576 A

  However, when the player performs an operation for a purpose different from the background shift, there is a possibility that the background shift unintended by the player may be performed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and the player performs an operation of an effect based on the same operation as the switching operation. However, the effect of one effect mode is different from the effect of one effect mode. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the switching to the game machine.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine which is one embodiment of the present invention,
A specific display result (variable display means for deriving a display result (for example, a definite decorative symbol, a definite special symbol, etc.) by variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can identify each For example, a game that controls to a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when a big hit symbol such as a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination is derived An effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a plurality of variable displays in any one of the effect modes (for example, the Noyama stage effect mode, the underwater stage effect mode, etc.). For example, the variable display start waiting process (step S170), the variable display start setting process (step S171), and the variable display effect process (step S) in FIG. 72), a special drawing waiting process (step S173) and the like, and when the effect is executed in one effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode) by the effect execution means, the one effect A switching setting means (for example, FIG. 34) that performs a setting for enabling a switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) that switches the effect according to the mode to another mode (for example, the field mode of the Noyama stage). 34. Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) in FIG. 34, in which an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S873 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S875 in FIG. 34). Etc., and the effect execution means is similar to the switching operation (for example, to the push button 31B). An operation effect (for example, an operation system effect) for performing an effect based on an operation action (for example, a button display for prompting an operation action on the push button 31B or a second dialog display after the operation action is performed). Operation stage execution means (for example, a normal stage production selection process in step S741 in FIG. 25, a special stage production selection process in step S771 in FIGS. 25 and 34, etc.) In the variable display in which the operation effect (for example, a speech effect or the like) is performed, the switching setting unit is configured to receive at least the operation effect execution unit (for example, the button for the line effect shown in FIGS. 37, 38, etc.). The period of validity, etc. is the switching operation (for example, the operation to the push button 31B for switching from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage). For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the button effective period of the dialogue production (about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of change). About 1 second after the lapse of about 3 seconds), the button is not valid for the telop display. Also, as in the example shown in FIGS. 37B, 38A, and 38B, the button effective period of the dialogue effect is not the button effective period of the telop display), and the switching setting means Indicates the ratio (for example, the ratio of executing the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set in the effect) to the state (the progress of the game (for example, the number of fluctuations), the normal (For example, in the special stage effect selection process (step S771) in FIG. 34), the value of the special stage counter is changed. When it is less than the second threshold value, the selection effect is not executed without performing the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, selection effect execution lottery B, selection effect execution lottery C), and the special stage count is performed. When the value is equal to or larger than the second threshold value and smaller than the third threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery A (step S865) is executed, and when the value of the special stage counter is equal to or larger than the third threshold value and smaller than the fourth threshold value. The selection effect execution lottery B (step S863) is executed, and the selection effect execution lottery C (step S861) is executed when the value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value. Determination ratio of selection effect execution with (for example, 1/5)> Determination ratio of selection effect execution with selection effect execution lottery B (for example, 1/15)> Selection effect execution with selection effect execution lottery C Determination ratio (for example, 1/100). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is configured to make the setting for enabling the switching operation after the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage) (for example, the performance). The ratio of execution of the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set is changed in accordance with the number of changes after the transition (value of the special stage counter).
According to such a configuration, although the player performs an operation of an effect based on the same operation as the switching operation, the effect is switched from the effect of one effect mode to the effect of another mode. Can be prevented.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above,
The switching setting means switches the switching operation (for example, from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage) during a period in which the operation effect execution means accepts the operation (for example, a button effective period of the dialog effect shown in FIG. 37, FIG. 38, etc.). When the operation action on the push button 31B is invalidated, the switching operation is subsequently validated (for example, by the restart processing (step S928, step S930) in FIGS. 35 and 36, for example, FIG. As shown in 37 (A), the button valid period for the telop display is reset (validated) after the button valid period for the dialogue production (after about 2 seconds from the start of the change to about 1 second after about 3 seconds). Moreover, the button valid period of the telop display is reset as in the example shown in FIGS. 37 (B), 38 (A), and 38 (B)).
According to such a configuration, the convenience of the player can be enhanced.

(3) In the above gaming machine (1) or (2),
The switch setting unit is configured to switch to the push button 31B that switches the switching operation (for example, from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage) after a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect execution unit receives the operation (for example, an operation act on the speech production). (For example, in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B)), the timing (after about 3 seconds from the start of the change) of the operation action with respect to the line production is delayed (about about 3 seconds from the start of the change). The button valid period is reset (validated) after 4 seconds).
According to such a configuration, the convenience of the player can be enhanced. Further, it is possible to prevent a stage shift from being performed without the intention of the player when the operation is delayed.

(4) In any of the gaming machines (1) to (3) above,
The switching setting unit may limit the setting for enabling the switching operation even in variable display where an effect different from the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation.

(5) In any of the above gaming machines (1) to (4),
A predetermined area (for example, FIG. 41) indicating that the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed (for example, the telop of (c) of FIG. 41). In step S875 of FIG. 34, effective setting notification means (for example, an effect control pattern including information related to the display of a telop) corresponding to the selected effect pattern is set. Etc.), and the effect execution means performs a display effect (for example, an effect by a decorative pattern, an effect of liveliness, etc.) executed in the predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in FIG. 41C). You may limit what you do.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the reception status of the switching operation from becoming difficult to understand.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the sorting apparatus in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example etc. of the content of the presentation control command in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the game random number counted by the side of the main board | substrate in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the fluctuation | variation category in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the fluctuation | variation category in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the determination ratio of the special figure display result and the determination ratio of jackpot type in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area in the first, second, and third embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in the special symbol process process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of start winning in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of winning random number determination processing in the first, second, and third embodiments. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production control main process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control process process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning determination process in the presentation control process process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the main announcement effect in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production | presentation control pattern setting process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special stage transfer determination process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal stage transition determination process in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special stage production | presentation selection process in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display in 1st, 2nd, 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect output process in 1st, 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining switching operation in 1st, 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the line production in 1st, 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special stage production | presentation selection process in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special stage production | presentation selection process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect output process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the interruption process in 3rd Embodiment, and a restart process. It is explanatory drawing explaining switching operation and the line production in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining switching operation and the line production in 3rd Embodiment. . 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation in the image display device 5.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) of the present invention, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like, and is a variable display game (a game executed with variable display of identification information) Or, in a special figure game as an example of variable display of identification information), special symbols (also referred to as “special figures”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be identified, can be changed. Is displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". . The variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A (variable display game for variably displaying the first special symbol) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and the variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 4B. (Variable display game for variably displaying the second special figure) is also referred to as a second special figure game. Further, when the first special figure game and the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “special figure games”.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. And, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol that becomes the variable display result of the decorative symbol in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is displayed. (Final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special graphic using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. In conjunction with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a finalized decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8”, Chinese numerals, English characters, and predetermined motifs). The character image may be any combination of eight character images, numbers, characters, symbols, and character images. The character image may be, for example, a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other arbitrary character image. It may be a decorative image showing a figure). A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  Below the image display device 5, there is provided a distribution device 200 for distributing the inflowing game balls, and below the distribution device 200, there are provided a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal winning ball device 6B. Yes. The normal winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal winning ball device 6B forms a second starting winning opening as a starting area that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The game balls that have flowed into the distribution device 200 are distributed to the upper part of the normal winning ball apparatus 6A or the upper part of the normal winning ball apparatus 6B so as to win either the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. (Or to facilitate winning).

  A passing gate 41 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6 </ b> C is provided below the passing gate 41. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an enlarged open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided, and a third starting prize opening is formed as a starting area.

  As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6C, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the third starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C, the game ball passes through the third start winning opening by tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C, although the game ball can enter the third start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the third start winning opening by closing the third starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example. As described above, the third start winning opening is changed between an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and a normal open state in which game balls hardly pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter).

  FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting apparatus 200. As shown in FIG. 2, an inflow port 201 into which a game ball can flow is provided at the top of the sorting apparatus 200. In addition, a sorting member 202 is provided inside the sorting device 200 for sorting the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 from the inlet 201 into either the left passage 203 or the right passage 204. Further, at the lower part of the sorting device 200, a left outlet 205 from which the game ball that has passed through the left passage 203 can flow out of the sorting device 200, and a game ball that has passed through the right passage 204 can flow out of the sorting device 200. And a right outlet 206 is provided.

  In the example shown in FIG. 2A, a state in which the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202 and a game ball can pass through the left passage 203 is shown. When the game ball flows into the sorting device 200 from the inlet 201 in the state shown in FIG. 2A, the gaming ball that flows in from the inlet 201 is left by the sorting member 200 as shown in FIG. It is distributed to the passage 203, passes through the left passage 203, and flows out from the left outlet 205. And since the 1st starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is located below the left outlet 205, the game ball flowing out from the left outlet 205 wins the first starting winning opening. .

  Further, when the game ball passes through the left passage 203, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 202, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 2 (a) and 2 (b), the sorting member 202 changes from a state of being tilted to the right side to a state of being tilted to the left side. With such a change, as shown in FIG. 2B, the left passage 203 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the right passage 204.

  Next, in such a state, as shown in FIG. 2 (c), when the game ball flows into the sorting device 200 from the inflow port 201, it flows in from the inflow port 201 as shown in FIG. 2 (d). The game balls are distributed to the right passage 204 by the distribution member 200, pass through the right passage 204, and flow out from the right outlet 206. And since the 2nd start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is located under the right outflow opening 206, the game ball which flowed out from the right outflow opening 206 wins a 2nd starting winning opening. .

  Further, when the game ball passes the right passage 204, the game ball hits the blade portion 202a provided in the rotation shaft portion of the sorting member 204, and the blade portion 202a is pushed by the weight of the game ball, As shown in FIGS. 2 (c) and 2 (d), the sorting member 202 changes from a state of falling to the left side to a state of falling to the right side. With such a change, as shown in FIG. 2D, the right passage 204 in the sorting apparatus 200 is shielded by the sorting member 202, and the game ball can pass through the left passage 203.

  By performing the operation as shown in FIG. 2, the game balls that have flowed into the sorting device 200 by the sorting member 202 are alternately distributed to the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, and formed in the normal winning ball device 6A. It is possible to alternately win the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B.

  In the description using FIG. 2, the game balls distributed to the left passage 203 win the first start winning opening at approximately 100%, and the game balls distributed to the right passage 204 perform the second start at approximately 100%. Although a case where a prize is won in the winning opening has been shown, there may be cases where a prize is not necessarily won in the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening even if it is distributed to the left passage 203 or the right passage 204. For example, in FIG. 2, the game ball is configured to fall directly below the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206, but a bottom member is provided at the left outlet 205 and the right outlet 206 to be viewed from the player. The structure is such that the game ball flows to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening after being once guided to the back side, and an opening is provided on the outer side surface of the left passage 203 and the right passage 204, so that the left passage 203 Alternatively, a part of the game balls distributed to the right passage 204 may spill out of the distribution device 200 from the opening and may not win the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening. Good.

  In the example of FIG. 2, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are provided outside the sorting apparatus 200. However, the sorting apparatus 200, the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, and the normal winning prize are shown. The ball device 6B may be integrally formed, and the first start winning port and the second starting winning port may be provided inside the sorting device 200.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 2, the case where the distribution device 200 is provided with two passages (the left passage 203 and the right passage 204) is shown, but the number of passages is not limited to two, but three or more passages. It may be provided. When three or more passages are provided, for example, a plurality of passages that can win a prize may be provided in either one or both of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening.

  In addition, in the example of FIG. 2, the case where the sorting member 202 of the sorting device 200 is physically switched to the left and right by the weight of the game ball is shown. For example, a solenoid or a motor for driving the sorting member 202 is used. The distribution member 202 may be driven.

  In addition, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In the start winning memory display area 5H, the number of holdings (first special figure holding memory) generated based on the first starting winning when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning hole formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. Number) or a second start winning opening formed by the game ball passing (entering) a second starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B, or a third starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C. A hold display for displaying the hold number (second special figure hold memory number) generated based on the third start winning when the game ball passes (enters) is specified.

  Specifically, a first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game using the first special figure or a variable display of decorative symbols is established (the first start prize is awarded). However, the variable display game based on the previously established start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. When the first start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied, information regarding variable display corresponding to the satisfied first start condition is stored (held) as the first hold information, and the first Based on the hold information, the hold display is performed in the start winning memory display area 5H. In addition, a second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game using the second special figure or a variable display of decorative symbols is established (second start prize or second prize) 3 is established due to the occurrence of a winning start, etc.), but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition (first start condition or second start condition) is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the big hit gaming state When the second start condition permitting the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled or the like, information relating to the variable display corresponding to the satisfied second start condition is stored as the second hold information (hold) Then, the hold display is performed in the start winning storage display area 5H based on the second hold information. Note that the hold display based on the first hold information and the hold display based on the second hold information are displayed in different display modes (for example, different colors, shapes, and sizes).

  In addition, when there is no particular distinction between the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the third starting winning opening, they are also simply referred to as “start winning opening”. Further, when the first start prize, the second start prize, and the third start prize are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start prize”. In addition, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished, they are also simply referred to as “start condition” or “execution condition”. Further, the first holding information and the second holding information are also simply referred to as “holding information” unless particularly distinguished. In addition, the variable display holding memory number obtained by adding the first special figure holding memory number and the second special figure holding memory number is also referred to as a total holding memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number). Further, the first start winning opening (starting area) formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is also referred to as a first starting area, the second starting winning opening (starting area) formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B, and the normal The third start winning opening (starting area) formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6C is also referred to as a second starting area.

  The hold display based on the first hold information displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed each time the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the last special game or the big hit game state is completed. Corresponding to the change (digestion) of one hold information being erased (digested) one by one. The hold display based on the second hold information displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H is displayed each time the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special game or the big hit game state. 2 Corresponding to the change (digestion) of the hold information being erased (digested) one by one.

  For example, when there are a plurality of hold displays in the start winning memory display area 5H when the last special figure game or jackpot game state is ended, the hold display (eg, the oldest display among the plurality of hold displays (for example, When the hold display displayed on the leftmost side of the start winning memory display area 5H is a hold display based on the first hold information, the first start condition is satisfied and the oldest display is displayed from the oldest. When the hold display (hold display based on the first hold information) is digested, and the hold display displayed from the oldest among the plurality of hold displays is the hold display based on the second hold information The hold display (hold display based on the second hold information) displayed since the oldest when the second start condition is satisfied is digested. In addition, with the digestion of the hold display displayed from the oldest, each of the other hold displays is moved to the digested hold display side (for example, the left side). In addition, when there is only one hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H when the last special figure game or the big hit game state is ended, the hold display is a hold display based on the first hold information. If there is, the first start condition is satisfied, and if the hold display is a hold display based on the second hold information, the second start condition is satisfied and the hold display is digested.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number (the number of memories in which the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is held) in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number (the number of memory in which the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held) in an identifiable manner.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a third starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected by, for example, a third starting opening switch 22C shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the third start switch 22C, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than or equal to a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the third start port switch 22C may be the same or different.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the OFF state, the special prize opening door closes the big winning prize opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning prize opening. Make it impossible. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ) Make it easier. In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  The game ball that has passed (entered) through the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third starting winning opening, More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter) through the winning opening. Accordingly, when the special winning ball apparatus 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special winning hole, which is advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning port. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”).

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the third starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member The general prize opening may be provided. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered any of the general prize opening is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate main body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick that the player holds, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation stick). Yes. The trigger button can be operated in a predetermined direction by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) in a state where the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push / pull operation on the trigger button may be incorporated in the operation rod.

  A tilt direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit includes two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation pole when viewed from the player side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. And a pair of transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pairs) arranged perpendicularly to the surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the photo sensor.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 31A). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor for detecting the player's operation act on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  An audio output member is provided in the periphery of the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the speaker 8UL and the speaker 8UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and the speaker 8LL and the speaker 8LR are installed at the lower left and right oblique parts of the upper plate (the upper left and right oblique parts of the lower plate). It is installed. Hereinafter, the speakers 8UL, 8UR, 8LL, and 8LR are also simply referred to as speakers 8 when not particularly distinguished. The speaker 8 outputs (reproduces) voice (sound and voice). For example, the speaker 8 outputs a production sound (also referred to as a sound effect) according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and outputs a warning sound according to the situation of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The production sound includes music, detection sound, response sound, notification sound, and the like. The music in the production sound is, for example, BGM, a song, etc. that are output according to the progress of the game. The detection sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound, voice (serif, message), or the like that is output in accordance with a detection result by a switch or a sensor (for example, detection of a winning at the first start winning opening, etc.). The response sound in the effect sound is, for example, a sound or a voice that is output in response to an operation action on the push button 31B. Since the operation action on the push button 31B is also detected by the push sensor, the response sound output in response to the operation action on the push button 31B is also a detection sound. The notification sound in the production sound is, for example, a sound or voice that is notified to request an operation action on the push button 31B, or a sound, voice, or the like that notifies the shift to the reach state when the reach state (described later) is shifted. The sound, voice, etc. suggesting or notifying that the game will shift to the jackpot gaming state before the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

  An example of the warning sound is a warning sound that is output when the game ball is excessively held (stored) in the lower plate, a warning sound that is output when the glass door (not shown) is open, or the like. .

  A light emitting member (light emitting body) that emits light as an effect or decoration is provided inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 3. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the light emitting member 9CC is installed at the upper position of the image display device 5, the light emitting member 9CL and the light emitting member 9CR are installed at the left and right positions of the image display device 5, and the light emitting member is installed at the upper position of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. The light emitting member 9SL and the light emitting member 9SR are installed on the left and right positions of the frame 3 for the gaming machine 9U. Hereinafter, when the light emitting members 9CC, 9CL, 9CR, 9U, 9SL, and 9SR are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as a lamp 9. For example, the lamp 9 may be composed of one or more LEDs, or may be composed of a flash lamp. The light emitting member 9U may be a rotating lamp (for example, a patrol lamp) having a rotating portion. In addition to the above, for example, various light emitting members may be installed around each structure (for example, the sorting device 200, the special variable winning ball device 7 and the like) in the game area.

  The image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the like described above are rendering devices that perform rendering, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes other rendering devices such as a rendering model having a drive unit as the rendering device. Also good.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) has a plurality of performance scenes (hereinafter referred to as stages) (provided), and is predetermined. When the above condition is satisfied, the stage is switched (shifted). Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) has a Noyama stage as a normal stage and an underwater stage as a special stage, and has predetermined conditions. When is established, one stage is switched to the other stage.

  An effect that forms a stage is referred to as a stage effect. In other words, each stage effect is executed (displayed) in each stage. In the normal stage (Noyama stage), for example, a stage effect (for example, see FIG. 39) for displaying a background image of Noyama and a character image related to Noyama (for example, a character image such as the sun) is executed. In the special stage (underwater stage), for example, a stage effect (for example, see FIG. 40) for displaying a background image in the sea and a character image (for example, a character image such as a fish) related to the sea is executed. The stage effect includes an effect executed during the stage transition in addition to the effect executed while staying at the stage. The stage effect at the stage transition is also referred to as a stage transition effect. Stage transition effects include a special stage transition effect when transitioning from a normal stage (Noyama stage) to a special stage (underwater stage), and a normal stage when transitioning from a special stage (underwater stage) to a normal stage (Noyama stage). Transition effects (for example, see FIG. 41 (e)) are included.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the stage transition from the normal stage to the special stage is performed by lottery. The stage transition from the special stage to the normal stage is performed by a player's operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) or a lottery. Details regarding the stage shift will be described later.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol such that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the gaming area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, the normal symbol display 20 is set based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol, such as the end of the previous general symbol game, is satisfied after the general symbol start condition for the normal symbol start is satisfied. The usual game is started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended, the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started. Further, a game ball that has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. 3, or the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected. After the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the game ball that has passed (entered) the formed third start winning opening is detected by the third start port switch 22C shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the big hit gaming state or the like, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

 In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable symbol display time as the special symbol variable time has elapsed after the variable symbol special display is started, the variable symbol variable symbol is displayed. The resulting definite special symbol (special diagram display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), as an example, special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” are used as jackpot symbols. The special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is the lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol in the special game, and the result of the specific display is “big hit”, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a predetermined upper limit time in the big hit gaming state. The large winning opening is opened in a period until (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Thereby, the round which makes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 the 1st state (open state) advantageous for a player is performed.

  A special prize-winning ball device that receives a game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the big prize-winning slot, with the grand prize-winning door that has opened the grand prize-winning port during the round. 7 is changed to the second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round that is the opening cycle of the big prize opening can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, “15” or the like). Even before the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the execution of the round may be terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball has not won a big prize opening). .

  Of the rounds in the big hit gaming state, the round in which the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29 seconds) is normally opened. Also called round. On the other hand, a round in which the upper limit time during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state (open state) is relatively short (for example, 0.1 seconds) is also referred to as a short-term open round.

  Of the special symbols showing the numbers "3", "5", and "7" that are jackpot symbols, the special symbols showing the numbers "3" and "7" are normally open round jackpot symbols and the number "5" The special symbol indicating is a short-term open round jackpot symbol. In the big hit game state (normal open big hit state) as the normal open round specific game state controlled after the normal open round big hit symbol is derived as the fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the big winning opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 The door is in the open state in a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds) that is the first period elapses or until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. By doing so, the round which changes the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 to the 1st state (open state) advantageous to a player is performed. The normal open big hit state is also referred to as a first specific game state.

  In the big hit game state (short-term open big hit state) as the short-term open round specific game state controlled after the short-term open round big hit symbol is derived as the final special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set in each round. A second time period (for example, 0) that the upper limit time for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the upper limit of the period during which the big prize opening is opened by the big prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the normal opening big hit state. 1 second). Note that in the short-term open big hit state, it is only necessary to control the opening period of the big prize opening to be the second period, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the normal open big hit state. Alternatively, in the short-term open big hit state, the number of rounds may be set to a second round number (eg, “2”) that is smaller than the first round number (eg, “15”) in the normal open big hit state.

  In such a short-term open big hit state, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening. However, the opening period of the special winning opening is the second period (such as 0.1 second) and is very short. For this reason, the short-term open big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The short-term open big hit state is also called a second specific game state.

  In addition, the jackpot gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state is not limited to the one with a short winning opening period compared to the big hit gaming state as the normal opening round specific gaming state, for example, the opening of the big winning mouth The period (upper limit time) is the same in the short-term open round specific game state and the normal open round specific game state, but in the short-term open round specific game state, there is an upper limit number of times (for example, two times) that makes the big prize opening state open. It may be less than the upper limit number of times (for example, 15 times) in the normal open round specific game state. That is, in the big hit gaming state as the short-term opening round specific gaming state, the period during which the game ball is changed to the first state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) in each round is longer than the first period in the normal opening round specific gaming state. As long as it is at least one of the short second period and the second round number being less than the first round number in the normal open round specific gaming state. .

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is derived as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit gaming state as the special gaming state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the short-term open big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) over the second period is repeatedly executed.

  In each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. Corresponding to the start of any of the special figure games using the second special figure, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. Then, during the period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbols is a predetermined value. May reach reach.

  Here, the reach state means a decorative symbol (“reach variation symbol” which has not been stopped yet when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms part of the jackpot combination. Is also a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Corresponding to the reach state, the decorative pattern fluctuation speed is reduced, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or a background image (still image, moving image). ) When the display mode of) is changed, the moving image different from the decorative design is reproduced and displayed, or the changing mode of the decorative design is changed, an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach state is executed. There is. Such effect operations such as the display of the character image, the change of the display mode of the background image, the reproduction display of the moving image, and the change of the variation mode of the decorative pattern are referred to as reach effect (or reach effect display). The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speaker 8 and the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9 and the like before reaching the reach state. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the production pattern, the possibility that the jackpot combination or the like is finally stopped and displayed after the reach production may be varied (also referred to as “hit expectation” or “hit reliability”). As a result, the jackpot expectation can be made different depending on which of a plurality of types of reach effects is executed, that is, depending on which reach effect appears. As an example, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the reach mode of normal reach and the reach mode of super reach that has a higher degree of big hit expectation than normal reach are set (prepared) in advance. ing.

  Note that the degree of expectation of jackpot is, for example, (probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability that the effect will be executed at the time of the big hit) × (probability of being the big hit) + (the jackpot (Probability that the effect is executed at times other than time) × (probability of not winning the jackpot)} (when the expectation degree of jackpot is “1”, the variable display result is always “hit”).

  Also, unlike a reach effect, there is a possibility that any reach effect will be executed (the possibility that the decorative symbol variable display state becomes a reach state), or a predetermined reach effect (for example, super reach) will be executed. It may be possible to execute a variable display effect for notifying the player that there is a possibility that the game will be performed or that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high. For example, during variable display of decorative symbols, variable display effects such as “slip (effect)” and “pseudo-continuity (effect)” realized by variable display operations such as decorative symbols can be executed. In addition to “sliding” and “pseudo ream”, various variable display effects using variable display operations such as decorative symbols may be executed.

  In the variable display effect of “slip”, the decorative symbols are changed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas) are displayed. 5L, 5R, etc. are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) of the decorative symbol display areas (for example, “left”) in the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols are displayed. The decorative design display area 5L and the “right” decorative design display area 5R or both) are displayed again after changing the decorative design, thereby changing the decorative design to be stopped and displayed. Done. Thus, in the variable display effect of “slip”, a predetermined number of decorative symbols are displayed after temporary display of a plurality of decorative symbols from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the display of a definite decorative symbol resulting in variable display. When the variable display state of the decorative pattern is re-executed, the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes the reach state, and when the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. is there.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after either one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. Before the final confirmed decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols (for example, predetermined pseudo-continuous chance eyes) are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is the total number of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, excluding the initial variation from when the decorative symbol variable display is started until all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped temporarily. Is the number of times that changes again. In the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, by changing the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) once to three times, the decoration pattern can be changed based on the first start condition or the second start condition being satisfied once. The display can appear as if it has been started 2-4 times in a row.

  Further, in the image display device 5, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, an audio output, light emission (lighting, blinking, light-off), etc., reach effect, “slip”, “pseudo” There is a possibility that any reach effect may be executed by an effect operation different from the variable display effect such as “ream”, a predetermined reach effect (for example, super reach) may be executed, You may make it alert | report to a player that a big hit expectation degree etc. are high. For example, in order to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that any reach effect may be executed by displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying an image as a message, outputting sound, emitting light, or the like. The notice effect may be executed.

  It is sufficient for the notice effect to include a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-judgment notice effect”). The pre-reading notice effect determines whether or not the variable display results in a “big hit” based on the hold information of the special-purpose game before starting the variable display subject to the notice. (Prefetching) is a notice effect to be executed based on the determination result. In the following description, the hold information that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as the target hold information, the hold display corresponding to the target hold information is referred to as the target hold display, and the variable display corresponding to the target hold information is displayed. Also referred to as target variable display. In addition, the pre-reading notice effect is executed during the digestion of the target hold information (when the target hold information including the variable display of the target is being digested) and before the target hold information. There are a case where it is executed during the digestion of the hold information, and a case where it is executed during the digestion of the hold information of the target and during the digestion of the hold information before the target hold information.

  The stage action that becomes a pre-reading notice effect by winning a certain game ball is that the player determines whether or not the content of the pre-reading notice effect is realized after winning the game ball (after the start condition is established). It may be executed (started) before it can be determined. For example, a stage action that is a pre-reading advance notice for informing (indicating) to a player that there is a possibility of reaching a reach state due to a winning of a certain game ball is at least a decorative pattern by winning of the game ball. Any variable display state may be executed (started) before the reach state (or non-reach state) is reached. In addition, at least a play operation of a pre-reading notice effect for informing (suggesting) a player that a variable display result may be a “hit” by winning a game ball What is necessary is just to be executed (started) before the winning decorative symbol by winning is stopped and displayed.

  When a special symbol that becomes a lost symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state is not changed to the reach state after the variable symbol variable display is started. In addition, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined non-reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped (derived) as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state is reached after the decorative symbol variable display starts. Correspondingly, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach-losing combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When the special big win symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as a special symbol for the special opening game as a special symbol for the special opening game, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding decoration that becomes a predetermined normal big hit combination (also referred to as “non-probability variable big hit combination”) among a plurality of types of big hit combinations after a predetermined reach production is executed in response to reaching the reach state. The symbol is stopped and displayed. As a normal jackpot combination, any one of the decorative symbols having an even symbol number is aligned and stopped on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, alphanumeric “6”). May be displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line).

  In addition, as described above, the decorative design may be a graphic design of a person or a character. For example, when a reach state is reached (a reach state with a decorative design with an odd design number may also be included). A special jackpot combination may be used in which a special decorative pattern (for example, a character “negative” or the like designed in a later manner) is stopped and displayed on the active line. For example, “2”, “Negative” and “2” are stopped after “2” reach, and “3”, “Negative” and “3” are stopped after “3” reach. It is good.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes the normal jackpot symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed display symbol of the regular jackpot combination is stopped and displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as “big hit type”) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal big hit”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” for the big hit type of “non-probable change”, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time-shortening control, the special symbol variable display time (special symbol variation time) in the special symbol game is shortened compared to the normal state. The normal state is a normal game state that is different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, and is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, an initialization process after power-on, such as when a system reset is performed) The same control as in the state in which is executed. In the time-saving control, one of the conditions is established first, that is, a special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the big hit gaming state ends, and the variable display result is “big hit”. Sometimes it just needs to end.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, among the special symbols that are normally open round jackpot symbols, when the probability variable bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating the number “7” is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol variable display state is Corresponding to having reached the reach state, after a reach effect similar to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “normal” is executed, among the multiple types of big hit combinations, a predetermined probability variation big hit combination May be displayed in a stopped manner. As the probable big hit combination, any one of the decorative symbols having an odd symbol number is aligned and displayed on a predetermined effective line in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, alphanumeric “7”). May be displayed in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in a straight line).

  In addition, for example, a special decorative pattern (for example, the character “Win”) is effective after reaching the reach state (which may include a reach state with an even numbered decorative pattern). It is good also as what is stopped and displayed on a line or a probability variation big hit combination. For example, “2”, “Win”, “2” stopped after “2” reach, or “3”, “Win”, “3” stopped after “3” reach, It is good. When the probability variation jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decoration symbol that is a normal jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decoration symbol.

  Regardless of whether the confirmed decorative symbol is a normal jackpot combination or a promiscuous jackpot combination, the variable display mode in which the probable jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game has a variable display result of “big hit” This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as “big hit type”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “big change” big hit type, the normal open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control (probability change control) is performed together with the time reduction control. By performing the probability variation control, the probability that the variable display result (special display result) becomes “big hit” in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. The certainty control may be ended when the condition that the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled again in the big hit gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended. Similar to the time-saving control, the probability variation control may be ended when a special number of games (for example, 100 times) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state. In addition, even if the probability variation control is ended when the probability variation control is ended by the probability variation control lottery executed every time the special game is started after the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability variation control is terminated. Good.

  When the time reduction control is performed, the normal symbol display unit 20 uses the normal symbol display unit 20 to make the normal symbol change time (normal symbol change time) shorter than that in the normal state, or to change the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the third start winning opening, such as control for making the tilt control time for performing longer than that for the normal state and control for increasing the number of tilts compared to that for the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the third start winning opening along with the time-shortening control and is advantageous to the player is also referred to as a high opening control. As the high opening control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined.

  By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the third start winning opening is in the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. Therefore, when the high opening control is performed, the game ball is fired toward the right side of the game area (so-called right-handed) so that the game ball starts passing through the passing gate 41 and the normal game is started. As a result, the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. Next, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. The period during which the high opening control can be performed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time reduction control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both the short time control and the high opening control are performed is also referred to as a short time state or a high base state. The gaming state in which the probability variation control is performed is also referred to as a probability variation state or a high probability state. A gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The probability variation state in which only the probability variation control is performed and the short time control or the high opening control is not performed is also referred to as a high probability low base state. It should be noted that only the gaming state in which the time-shortening control or the high opening control is performed together with the probability variation control is sometimes referred to as a “probability variation state”, and may be referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from the high probability low base state. On the other hand, a probability variation state (high probability low base state) in which only time variation control is performed and time reduction control or high opening control is not performed is sometimes referred to as a time variation probability variation state in order to be distinguished from a high accuracy high base state. The short time state in which the short time control or the high opening control is performed without performing the probability variation control is also referred to as a low probability high base state. The normal state in which neither the probability variation control, the time reduction control, nor the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When at least one of time-shortening control and probability variation control is performed in a gaming state other than the normal state, the probability that the special-purpose game can be executed frequently and the variable display result in each special-purpose game becomes “big hit” As a result, the player is in an advantageous state. A gaming state advantageous to a player different from the big hit gaming state is also referred to as a special gaming state.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, when a short-term open round jackpot symbol such as a special symbol indicating “5” is stopped or displayed, or a small bonus symbol such as a special symbol indicating “2” is stopped or displayed. In some cases, the variable display state of the decorative symbol does not reach the reach state, and any one of a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols determined in advance as the chance of opening may be stopped and displayed. In addition, when the short-term opening round jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a predetermined reach effect is executed in response to the variable symbol display state of the ornament symbol being reached. In some cases, a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined reach combination is stopped and displayed.

  Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a short-term open round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is when the variable display result is "big hit" This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a “big hit type”) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprise probability big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”). Based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit” in the “surprise” big hit type, the short-term open big hit state is controlled, and after the end, the probability variation control may be performed together with the short time control.

  Based on the fact that the small hit symbol such as the special symbol indicating the number “2” is stopped and the variable display result is “small hit” as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the small hit game state is controlled. After that, the gaming state is not changed, and the gaming state before the variable display result is “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-drawing effect, after temporarily displaying a decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R in the image display device 5, for example, in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R When the same decorative symbols are gathered, the variation is made again, and either the decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination or the decorative symbol that is a normal jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display).

  After the decisive decorative symbol that is normally a big hit combination is derived and displayed, the next round starts after one round ends in the big hit gaming state at the start of the big hit gaming state or during the round in the big hit gaming state During the big hit that will be a promising change notification effect whether or not to control to the probable change state, such as the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state until the start of the next variable display game A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”.

  In addition, when it is not a big hit gaming state (after the digestion of the hold display and before the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern, or after the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern that is a combination of the lost, before the digestion of the next hold display) Stage effects are also executed in the display area of the display device 5. For example, on a normal stage (Noyama stage), a background image of Noyama, a character image related to Noyama (for example, a character image of the sun, etc.) and the like are displayed. In addition, in a special stage (underwater stage), an underwater background image, a character image related to the underwater (for example, a character image such as a fish), and the like are displayed. It should be noted that the stage effect may be a notification that the jackpot expectation is high as in the case of the reach effect, “slip”, “pseudo-run”, or the like. For example, a character image that imitates UFO appears on the normal stage (Noyama stage) with high reliability, and a character image that imitates mermaid appears on the special stage (underwater stage) as high reliability. You may let them.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control.

  The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the lamp. Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical component for rendering such as 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 is an electrical component for effects such as display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speaker 8, and all or part of the on / off operation in the lamp 9. Is provided with a function of determining the control content for causing a predetermined performance operation to be executed.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speaker 8 based on a command, control data, etc. from the effect control board 12. A processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and performs lighting / extinguishing driving in the lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. The lamp driver circuit to perform is installed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 has wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23. It is connected. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23 detect a game ball as a game medium such as a sensor. Any structure having an arbitrary configuration is possible. In addition to the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23, the pachinko gaming machine 1 similarly has other switches connected to the main board 11. (For example, a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the glass door (not shown), a switch for detecting the open / closed state of the game board 2 itself, a switch for detecting unauthorized vibration, and a switch for detecting unauthorized electromagnetic waves) You may have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. A wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments). The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 4A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is constituted by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 4A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decoration symbol variably displayed in each of the decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated. In the “variation pattern” in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), in addition to the variation mode of the fluctuating decorative pattern itself, the effect image displayed during the variation of the decorative symbol etc. Is also included.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 4B, different EXT data depending on the determination result of whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit” or the big hit type determination result. Is set.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stoppage (determination) of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “15”) in the normal opening big hit state or the short opening big hit state. Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the first start prize is generated when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start prize port formed by the normal prize ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the symbol display device 4A is established.

  The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a second start winning is generated, or The second special symbol display device 4B is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a third start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 6C is detected by the third start opening switch 22C and a third start winning is generated. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure is established. That is, although it is referred to as the second start opening winning designation command, in addition to the second start winning opening, even when the second starting condition is satisfied by passing (entering) the game ball through the third starting winning opening, A second start opening prize designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in a start winning memory display area 5H or the like.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), as the stored storage information, the start winning prize is received at the first starting prize opening or the second starting prize opening (or the third starting prize opening) is started. A first start port prize designation command or a second start slot prize designation command for designating whether a prize has been won or not, and a first special figure reserved memory number or a second special figure reserved memory number designation is designated. A command or a second pending storage number notification command is transmitted. It should be noted that when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second one) indicating that the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory count decreases, the reserved memory count addition designation command (the second reserved figure count designation command) indicates that the first special figure reserved memory count or the second special figure reserved memory count has decreased. 1 reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. Further, a total reserved memory number addition designation command (total reserved memory number subtraction designation command) for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total reserved memory number may be transmitted.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, and the determination result of the big hit type as the winning determination result. is there. The command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a variation pattern determination result (a variation category in which variation patterns are classified by type, also referred to as variation pattern type) as a winning determination result.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), a random number value for determining a special figure display result when a start winning is generated in the winning random value determination process (see FIG. 16A). It is determined whether or not the variable display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” based on MR1. The type of jackpot is determined based on the numerical value MR2, and the variation category is determined based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation category. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines whether or not the variable display result is determined as “big hit” or “small hit” based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and determines the type of big hit. In addition to being able to recognize, the change category can be recognized based on the value set in the change category command.

  The effect control commands such as the change pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are used when the effect control CPU 120 controls one or more effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, etc.). . Hereinafter, an effect control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5 is a display control command, an effect control command used for controlling audio output from the speaker 8 is an audio control command, and a light emission operation of the lamp 9 ( The effect control command used for controlling the lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation is also referred to as a lamp control command. Note that, among the effect control commands, there may be a display control command, a voice control command, and a lamp control command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores the various fluctuation data. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 5, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), on the main board 11 side, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random for determining the jackpot type Numeric data representing each of the numerical value MR2, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation category, the random value MR4 for determining the normal display result, and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 uses the random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted.

  Next, the decorative pattern variation pattern will be described. Hereinafter, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” is referred to as “losing variation pattern”. The loss variation pattern includes a “non-reach variation pattern” (“non-reach loss variation pattern”, “non-reach” corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is “non-reach” among the cases where the variable display result is “loss”. (Also referred to as “(loss) variation pattern”) ”or“ reach variation pattern ”(“ reach loss variation pattern ”) corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is“ reach ”among the cases where the variable display result is“ losing ”. Also referred to as).

  A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a “hit variation pattern”. The hit fluctuation pattern includes a “big hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the “small hit fluctuation pattern” corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit”. As the big hit variation pattern, a plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each of the big hit types may be prepared.

  Non-reach variation patterns are prepared for multiple variation patterns with different variation times, corresponding to time-short control executed when the total number of reserved memories is large, or when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the short-time state. Good. As a result, any variation pattern is selected according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state, thereby enabling control to shorten the variation time according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state.

  For variation patterns including a reach effect such as a big hit variation pattern and a reach variation pattern, a variation pattern corresponding to the reach mode of each reach effect is prepared. Note that the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed is referred to as “normal reach fluctuation pattern”, and the fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach is executed is referred to as “super reach fluctuation pattern”.

  FIG. 6 shows a specific example of the variation category in the low base state (for example, the low probability low base state / normal state). In FIG. 6, the variation category “PA1” is a shortened / non-reach (loss) variation category. The fluctuation category “PA2” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA3” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA4” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PA5” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB3” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB5” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation category. In FIG. 6, the description of the variation category in the case of the small hit is omitted, but it is sufficient that one or more variation categories are set as described above. The same applies to FIG.

  Each variation category shown in FIG. 6 includes one or more variation patterns. For example, the variation pattern “PA1-1” is a variation pattern belonging to the variation category “PA1”. The fluctuation pattern “PA1-1” is a non-reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is shortened. The variation patterns “PA2-1” to “PA2-3” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA2”. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” is a non-reach (lack) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as non-reach (lack). The variation pattern “PA2-2” is a non-reach variation pattern in which a slip effect is executed. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-2” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the slip effect is executed. The same applies to other fluctuation patterns in which a slip effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-3” is longer than the special figure fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern “PA2-1” because the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The same applies to other variation patterns in which pseudo continuous variation (effect) is executed. The variation patterns “PA3-1” and “PA3-2” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA3”. The fluctuation pattern “PA3-1” is a normal reach (lost) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA3-2” is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation patterns “PA4-1” to “PA4-4” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA4”. The variation pattern “PA4-1” is a super reach α (lost) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length as the super reach α (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA4-2” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo effect of pseudo-variation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-3” is a super reach α (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (production) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4-4” is a super reach α (lost) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation patterns “PA5-1” to “PA5-4” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PA5”. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-1” is a super reach β (lost) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as super reach β (lost). The fluctuation pattern “PA5-2” is a super-reach β (loss) fluctuation pattern in which a pseudo effect of pseudo-variation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-3” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA5-4” is a super reach β (losing) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo-continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation patterns “PB3-1” and “PB3-2” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PB3”. The fluctuation pattern “PB3-1” is a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as a normal reach (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB3-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation patterns “PB4-1” to “PB4-4” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PB4”. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-1” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as the super reach α (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB4-2” is a super-reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a frustration effect of pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4-4” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation patterns “PB5-1” to “PB5-4” are variation patterns belonging to the variation category “PB5”. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-1” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the special figure fluctuation time is a normal length as super reach β (big hit). The fluctuation pattern “PB5-2” is a super-reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which a frustration effect of pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-3” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB5-4” is a super reach β (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  Hereinafter, each variation pattern belonging to the variation category “PA1” is referred to as a variation pattern “PA1-X”. For example, in the case of the above example, the variation pattern “PA1-X” is the variation pattern “PA1-1”. Each variation pattern belonging to the variation category “PA2” is referred to as a variation pattern “PA2-X”. For example, in the case of the above example, the variation pattern “PA2-X” is any one of the variation pattern “PA2-1”, the variation pattern “PA2-2”, and the variation pattern “PA2-3”). The same applies to the fluctuation patterns “PA3-X” to “PB5-X”. As will be described in detail later, the expectation degree of jackpot is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach.

  FIG. 7 shows a specific example of a variation category in a high base state (for example, a high-accuracy high-base state / a certain variation state). In FIG. 7, the variation category “PA-T” is a variation category of shortening variation (losing). The variation category “PA-JD” is a variation category of weak enemy battle / minute (losing). The variation category “PA-KD” is a variation category of strong enemy battle / minute (losing). The fluctuation category “PB-JL” is a weak enemy battle / negative (big hit) fluctuation category. The fluctuation category “PB-KL” is a strong enemy battle / negative (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation category “PB-JW” is a variation category of weak enemy battle / win (big hit). The variation category “PB-KW” is a variation category of strong enemy battle / win (big hit). Note that the weak enemy battle is a battle effect (an effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other) against a weak enemy character. A strong enemy battle is a battle performance for a strong enemy character.

  The variation categories shown in FIG. 7 each have one or more variation patterns, like the variation categories shown in FIG. For example, the variation pattern “PA-TX” is each variation pattern belonging to the variation category “PA-T”. The same applies to the fluctuation patterns “PA-JD-X” to “PB-KW-X”. The variation pattern “PA-TX” is a non-reach variation pattern having a predetermined shortened special figure variation time, and is a variation pattern in which no battle effect is executed. The fluctuation pattern “PA-JD-X” is a reach fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is a draw. The fluctuation pattern “PA-KD-X” is a reach fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is a draw. The fluctuation pattern “PB-JL-X” is a big hit fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is lost. The fluctuation pattern “PB-KL-X” is a big hit fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is lost. The fluctuation pattern “PB-JW-X” is a big hit fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a weak enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is won. The fluctuation pattern “PB-KW-X” is a big hit fluctuation pattern having a predetermined special figure fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which a strong enemy battle is executed and the result of the battle is won.

  Although details will be described later, when a battle effect variation pattern (“PB-JW-X” or “PB-KW-X”) in which a battle result is won is executed, it is a probable big hit. Specifically, when the strong enemy battle fluctuation pattern “PB-KW-X” in which the battle result wins is executed, the “first big hit (15R probability change)” in FIG. When the fluctuation pattern “PB-JW-X” of the weak enemy battle that wins is executed, the “second big hit (10R probability change)” of FIG.

  Also, when a battle effect variation pattern (“PB-JL-X” or “PB-KL-X”) in which the result of the battle is lost is executed, it is usually a big hit. Specifically, either the strong enemy battle variation pattern “PB-KL-X” in which the battle result is lost or the weak enemy battle variation pattern “PB-JL-X” in which the battle result is defeated Is executed, the “third big hit (10R normal)” in FIG.

  Also, when a battle effect variation pattern (“PA-JD-X” or “PA-KD-X”) in which a battle result is a draw is executed, or when a battle effect variation pattern is not executed (“PB-T-”). When “X”) is executed, it is lost. Note that in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the probability variation state is maintained during the loss.

  Also, a strong enemy battle is more likely to lose than a weak enemy battle ("third big hit (10R normal)" is likely to be lost). That is, the strong enemy battle is a disadvantageous effect that is more easily controlled to a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player than the probability variation state, as compared to the weak enemy battle. Further, a weak enemy battle is easier to win than a strong enemy battle (“first big hit (15R probability change)” or “second big hit (10R probability change)”). That is, the weak enemy battle is an advantageous performance that is more easily controlled to a probability variation state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, as compared to the strong enemy battle. In other words, when a weak enemy battle is controlled to a specific game state (big hit game state), the special condition ("big hit" is "first big hit" or "second big hit", and during the big hit round This is an advantageous effect that has a high ratio that the game ball passes (enters) the specific member. On the other hand, a strong enemy battle is an advantageous performance with a low ratio of special conditions when controlled to a specific gaming state.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of command tables (for example, information for specifying the contents of the control commands) used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11. Has been.

  The special figure display result (variable display result) of the special figure game includes a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101 before the fixed special symbol that is the special figure display result of the special figure game is derived and displayed. This is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the special figure display result determination table is referred to when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (the low probability state). The ROM 101 stores a figure display result determination table and a special figure display result determination table which is referred to when the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state). In each special figure display result determination table, a determination value (also referred to as a determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result.

  In addition, when the special figure display result “big hit” is determined, before the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed, the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101 and the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type are displayed. Based on this, the jackpot type is determined. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), as the jackpot type determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (low probability state) or the probability variation state (high probability state). ) Is stored in the ROM 101 in common with the jackpot type determination table. In the jackpot type determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to the jackpot type.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the determination ratio of the special figure display result and the determination ratio of the jackpot type. FIG. 8A shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state (the low probability state). According to FIG. 8A, a out of 65536 determination values (65536 from “0” to “65535” shown in FIG. 5) that can be taken by the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is special. The figure display result “big hit” is assigned, and the determination ratio (p1 (%)) of “big hit” is (a / 65536) × 100. For example, when a is 512 from “0” to “511”, p1 is about 0.8% (512 ÷ 65536). p2 is a determination rate of “losing”.

  FIG. 8B shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state). According to FIG. 8B, among the 65536 possible determination values (65536 from “0” to “65535” shown in FIG. 5) of the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, b are special. The figure display result “big hit” is assigned, and the determination ratio (p3 (%)) of “big hit” is (b / 65536) × 100. However, FIG. 8A shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result in the normal state (low accuracy state), and FIG. 8B shows the determination ratio of the special figure display result in the probability variation state (high accuracy state). > A. For example, when b is 2048 from “0” to “2047”, p3 is about 3.1% (2048 ÷ 65536). p4 is a determination rate of “losing”.

  FIG. 8C shows a case where the special figure display result of the first special figure game is “big hit”, that is, the special figure to be changed (also referred to as a fluctuation special figure) is the first special figure, and the special figure display result. Is “big hit”, or the special figure display result of the second special figure game is “big hit”, that is, the variable special figure is the second special figure and the special figure display result is “big hit”. It represents the determination ratio of jackpot type in the case of. According to FIG. 8C, among 100 possible determination values (100 from “0” to “99” shown in FIG. 5) of the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, x is the big hit type “ Is assigned to “first big hit”, and the determination ratio (x (%)) of “first big hit” is x. Of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, y pieces are assigned to the big hit type “second big hit”, and the determination ratio of “second big hit” (y (%)) ) Is y. Of the 100 determination values that can be taken by the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, z are assigned to the big hit type “third big hit”, and the determination ratio of the “third big hit” (z (%)) ) Is z.

  The “first big hit” is a “big hit” from which the “big hit” of “15R probability variation” is derived. The “second big hit” is the “big hit” from which the “big hit” of “10R probability change” is derived. The “third big hit” is a “big hit” from which a “big hit” of “10R normal” is derived. For example, a specific member (not shown) that shifts to a probable change state when a game ball passes (approaches) is provided inside the big prize opening, and “first big hit” is achieved by the control during the execution of the round. Sometimes a “big hit” of “15R probability change” is derived, “a big hit” of “10R probability variation” is derived when “the second big hit” is reached, and “10R normal” is a “big hit” when it is “the third big hit” "May be introduced. For example, during the execution of the “third big hit” round, the game winning ball door (or the specific member) is controlled so that the game ball cannot pass (enter) into the specific member or is difficult to pass (enter). During the execution of the “first big hit” or “second big hit” round, the big winning opening door (or the specific member) so that the game ball can pass (enter) or easily pass (enter) the specific member. May be controlled.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation category determination table that is referred to in order to determine the variation category as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, a plurality of variable category determination tables are stored in accordance with the current game state (normal state / probability change state), special figure display result, number of reserved memories, and the like. That is, the variation category is based on any variation category determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (normal state / probability variation state), special figure display result, number of reserved memories, and the random number MR3 for determining the variation category. Determined. Instead of a plurality of variation category determination tables, one large variation category determination table including information on all the variation category determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  Further, the ROM 101 stores a variation pattern determination table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types. Specifically, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation category are stored. That is, the variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern determination table corresponding to the variation category and the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern stored in the ROM 101. Instead of a plurality of variation pattern determination tables, one large variation pattern determination table including information on all variation pattern determination tables may be stored in the ROM 101.

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data (for example, a special figure) Process flags). Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In such a RAM 102, a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 9 is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 9 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a hold specific information storage unit 151C, a general figure hold storage unit 151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 152, a game control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first starting winning is generated. The hold information (first hold information) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates a reservation number with a winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and a random number is generated by the CPU 103 based on the passage (entrance) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating random number values extracted from the circuit 104 or the like (for example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3) is stored as pending information until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). To do.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B has a special game (not yet started) even though the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6B and a second start winning has occurred. The game ball passes through the hold information (second hold information) of the second special symbol display device 4B in the second special symbol display device 4B) and the third start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6C. Holding information (second holding information) of a special figure game (special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has entered (entered) and has received the third start winning prize but has not yet started Remember. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning port (or the third starting winning port) and passes the game ball ( Numerical data indicating random values (for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3) extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 on the basis of the entry), and the number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4)) until it is reached.

  The holding specific information storage unit 151C is a winning order of the entire holding information including the holding information stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 151A and the holding information stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B ( In association with the hold number which is the detection order of game balls), the hold information based on the occurrence of the first start winning (first hold information), or the hold information based on the occurrence of the second start winning or the third start winning ( (Second hold information) is stored. In the holding specific information storage unit 151C illustrated in FIG. 9, “first” indicates that the information is first holding information, and “second” indicates that the information is second holding information.

  In the case of the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, and the hold specific information storage unit 151C shown in FIG. 9, five pieces of reservation information as a whole (the total number of reservation storages is five) However, the winning order is determined based on the hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition (hold information with the random value MR1 being “19”) and the hold information based on the establishment of the second start condition (the random value MR1). Hold information with a value of “81”), hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition (hold information with a random number value MR1 of “22832”), hold information based on the establishment of the second start condition (with the random value MR1) The value is “52679”, the hold information based on the establishment of the first start condition (the hold information with the random value MR1 being “6104”).

  The first holding information based on the establishment of the first start condition by passing (entering) the game ball through the first start winning opening, and the game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning opening or the third start winning opening. ), The second hold information based on the establishment of the second start prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit.

  The usual figure holding storage unit 151 </ b> D stores the holding information of the usual figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151D determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed through the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR4 is stored as pending information until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores the first reserved memory number count value and the second special figure reserved memory number, which are stored values of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the first special figure reserved memory number. The second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting, the total reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number, etc. Remembered.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores the data, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating an effect image for the image display device 5 and an information signal (effect sound signal) indicating a command for the audio control board 13 are transmitted to the effect control board 12. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 14 and the like are connected. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. For example, the ROM 121 determines the type of the background image, the display mode of the hold display, the main notice effect (for example, serif effect, step-up effect, etc.), the selection effect (described later), the presence / absence of stage transition, and the like. Various decision tables to be referred to are stored.

  In addition, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 120 to control effect operations performed by various effect devices (for example, the image display device 5, the speaker 8, the lamp 9, and the effect model). Data to be stored is stored. By setting the effect control pattern, various variable display operations such as decorative symbols, notice effects (including pre-read notice effects), and the like are realized.

  The various effect control patterns are composed of data indicating the control contents of various effect operations executed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the effect control pattern is a decoration corresponding to a plurality of types of variation patterns, in the period from when the variation of the special symbol is started in the special game until the finalized special symbol that is the special graphic display result is derived and displayed. Variable display operation of symbols, mainly various operation operations performed after digestion of hold display and before stop display of finalized design (line effect, step-up effect, reach effect, redraw effect), hold display Various presentation operations that are performed after digestion and before stoppage display of the confirmed decorative pattern, and after stoppage display of the finalized decorative pattern that is the combination of the loss and before digestion of the next hold display (production by holding display) It is composed of data indicating control contents of various rendering operations such as motion and rendering operations by stage effects).

  FIG. 10A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is composed of control data for controlling various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, the timing of switching the effects control, and the like. In addition, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for designating the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the effect control process timer (effect control process timer value) provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM incorporated in the effect control microcomputer 120. ) And a determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control microcomputer 120 when a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11. Data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating an audio output mode from the speaker 8 such as data indicating an output mode of a production sound or the like interlocked with a variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speaker 8. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the light emission operation mode of the lamp 9 (light emitter). That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the light emission operation (lighting operation, blinking operation, and extinguishing operation) of the lamp 9. The operation detection control data includes, for example, data indicating a period during which an operation on the operation unit such as the operation button 30 is effectively detected, control contents of the rendering operation when the operation is detected effectively, and the like. That is, the operation detection control data is data that designates an effect operation according to an operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern including a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 10B is a diagram for explaining various rendering operations executed according to the contents of the rendering control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches any of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display effect images such as images and background images on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 8 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 9 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data. In the effective period, control for receiving the operation on the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B and determining the production content is performed. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect operation shown in FIG. 10B corresponds to the entire period from the start of the change of the decorative design to the final stop, but is not limited to this, and during the variable display of the decorative design An effect control pattern for executing an effect operation corresponding to a part of the period (for example, a period of executing the notice effect) may be provided. Alternatively, the effect operation is executed corresponding to a predetermined period other than the variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the jackpot game state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the jackpot game state, etc.) The effect control pattern may be provided.

  When setting the production control pattern, the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the pattern data constituting the relevant production control pattern may be stored. The storage address in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the stored data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer determination values. If the production control process timer value matches, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data is performed. Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect devices (image display device 5, speaker 8, lamp 9, and the like) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the movable member provided in the production model is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the production control pattern set in this way is output from the production control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, the lamp control board 14, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  In the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 11A as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 11A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. Yes.

  The effect control flag setting unit 191 has a plurality of types whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. The flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating flag values and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as, for example, an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A as shown in FIG. 11B is a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Is remembered. The receiving command buffer 194A at the time of starting winning is provided with a storage area (an area corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total reserved storage number. When there is a start winning at the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening or the third starting winning opening, a starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening prize designation command or second starting opening prize designation command), design A set of four commands: a designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command (first reserved memory count notification command or second reserved memory count notification command) is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 Is done. In the start winning reception command buffer 194A, a storage area is secured so that these start opening winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, and pending storage number notification commands can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the commands in the order received at the start winning prize from the head in the empty area of the start winning reception command buffer 194A. At the time of starting winning a prize, command transmission is performed in the order of a starting opening prize specifying command, a symbol specifying command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. Therefore, if the command is received normally, as shown in FIG. 11B, the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the fluctuation are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. The category command and the stored memory number notification command are stored in this order. In FIG. 11B, commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “4”.

  The command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 11B is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1”) each time variable symbol display is started. Is deleted from the stored contents, and the stored contents thereafter are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 11B, when the variable display of a new decorative symbol is started, each command stored in the buffer number “1” is deleted, and the command corresponding to the buffer number “2” is deleted. Each command stored in the area is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number “1”, and each command stored in the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “3” to “4” is changed to the buffer number. Shifted to an area corresponding to “2” and “3”.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the data constituting the prefetch notice buffer 194B as shown in FIG. 11C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Is remembered. The prefetch notice buffer 194B is provided with storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the respective data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, in the prefetching notice buffer 194B, the contents of the prefetching notice effect relating to each hold information determined by the effect control CPU 120 or the like are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . When the hold information (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in the start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. 11B due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the notice buffer 194B, the contents associated with the buffer number are also deleted. In addition, due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc., the hold information (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is changed to another buffer number in the start winning reception command buffer 194A of FIG. When shifted, the contents associated with the buffer number in the prefetch notice buffer 194B are also shifted to the other buffer number.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial setting after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 12 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B, the third start port switch 22C, and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and if necessary, a warning can be generated according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B and setting of opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade.

  After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, the effect control among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. In the special symbol process of FIG. 13, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a start winning process executed in steps S208, S211 and S214 of FIG. FIG. 16A is a flowchart showing an example of a winning random number determination process executed in step S306 of FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 14, the CPU 103 first determines the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A. It is determined whether or not the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the first special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S202). For example, the CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special figure reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154. When the number of first special figure reservation storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “1” ( Step S207).

  When the first start opening switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), After the processing of step S209 is executed, the second start port switch 22B is based on the detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6B. It is determined whether or not it is on (step S203). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is ON (step S203; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S204). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S210).

  When the second start port switch 22B is OFF in step S203 (step S203; No), or when the second special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S204 (step S204; Yes), After the processing of step S212 is executed, the third start port switch 22C is based on the detection signal from the third start port switch 22C provided corresponding to the third start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6C. It is determined whether or not is on (step S205). At this time, if the third start port switch 22C is on (step S205; Yes), the second special figure holding memory number that is the holding memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. It is determined whether or not (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) (step S206). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special figure reserved memory number by reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special figure holding storage number is not the upper limit value in step S206 (step S206; No), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to “2” ( Step S213).

  After executing the process of step S207, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S208), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S209), and the process of step S203 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S210, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S211), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S212), and the process of step S205 is performed. Proceed to After executing the process of step S213, the start winning time process (FIG. 15) is executed (step S214), the stored value of the start port buffer is “0 (initialized)” (step S215), and the start winning determination process Exit. As a result, even if any two or more of the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the third start port switch 22C detect the start winning of the game ball at the same time, they are based on the respective detections. Processing can be completed.

  As the start winning process (steps S208, S211, and S214), the CPU 103 updates the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, by one (step S301). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening or the third starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. . Following the processing in step S301, the total number of reserved memories is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S302). For example, the total reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S302, the CPU 103 determines the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted (step S303). The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the head of the empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S304). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S304, transmission setting of a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value is performed (step S305). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. 12 is set to transmit a first start opening winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Setting for transmitting the second start opening winning designation command is performed. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 12 after the special symbol process process is completed, for example. Is transmitted.

  Following the process of step S305, a winning random number determination process is executed (step S306). Thereafter, for example, by storing the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the reserved storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12. For this purpose (step S307). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  As the winning random number determination process (step S306), the CPU 103 identifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, by confirming the state of the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152 or the like. (Step S401 in FIG. 16A). The CPU 103 may identify the normal state when the probability variation flag is off, and identify the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is on.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S401, the CPU 103 selects a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the gaming state from a plurality of special figure display result determination tables (step S402). For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, the special figure display result determination table in FIG. 8A is selected. Further, for example, when the gaming state is a probable change state, the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8B is selected.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S402, the CPU 103 converts the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402 and numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S303 in FIG. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403). Specifically, the above-described special figure display result determination is performed within a predetermined jackpot determination range (the range of determination values assigned to the special figure display result “big hit”) in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402. It is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for use. The CPU 103 may perform the above determination by comparing the minimum value (lower limit value) or the maximum value (upper limit value) of the jackpot determination range with the above-described numerical data, or may determine each determination value within the jackpot determination range. The determination may be made by comparing with the numerical data described above. The same applies to other determinations such as determination of jackpot type.

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S403; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” as in the process of step S403. That is, within the predetermined small hit determination range (the range of determination values assigned to the special figure display result “small hit”) in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S402, It is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 (step S404).

  If it is determined in step S404 that it is not within the small hit determination range (step S404; No), a symbol designating command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” is sent to the effect control board 12. Settings for transmission are performed (step S405). It should be noted that even if there is no small hit determination range in the special figure display result determination table selected in step S401, it is determined that it is not within the small hit determination range. If it is determined in step S404 that it is within the small hit determination range (step S404; Yes), a symbol designation command corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “small hit” is given to the effect control board 12. Are set for transmission (step S407).

  If it is determined in step S403 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the jackpot type is determined (step S409). In the process of step S409, the jackpot type determination table of FIG. 8C is selected, and numerical data indicating the selected jackpot type determination table and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type extracted in step S303 of FIG. Based on the above, it is determined whether the big hit type is “first big hit”, “second big hit”, or “third big hit”. Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result by the process of step S409 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S410).

  After executing any of the processes in steps S405, S407, and S410, the variation category is determined (step S412). In the process of step S412, the CPU 103 determines a variation category according to the current gaming state (normal state / probability variation state), special figure display result, the number of reserved memories, and the like. That is, the CPU 103 determines the variation category according to the current gaming state, the special figure display result (for example, the determination result of step S403 or step S404, etc.) and the number of reserved storages from the plurality of variation category determination tables. Select a table (a variation category determination table corresponding to the jackpot type when the special figure display result is a big hit), and select a variation category determination range (assigned to any variation category in the selected variation category determination table). In the range of the determination value), it is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation category extracted in step S303 in FIG.

  Here, the determination of the variation category and the like will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 6, FIG. 7, FIG. When the current gaming state is the normal state (when the current gaming state is identified as the normal state in step S401) and when it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” ( Step S404; No), the total pending memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. 9 is read, and the variation categories “PA1” “PA2” shown in FIG. "PA3" "PA4" "PA5" is determined. That is, the CPU 103 first determines a plurality of variation categories in which different determination values are assigned to each of one or more variation categories of the variation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, and “PA5”. One of the variation category determination tables corresponding to the total number of reserved memories is selected from the table. For example, there is table 1 when the total number of reserved memories is 1, table 2 when the total number of reserved memories is 2 or 3, and table 3 when the total number of reserved memories is 4 to 8 The CPU 103 selects a table corresponding to the total number of reserved memories from Table 1 to Table 3. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table compares the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table with the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 extracted in step S303 of FIG. Thus, one of the variation categories “PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”, “PA4”, and “PA5” is determined. Note that the variation category “PA1” may be more easily determined when the number of reserved storage is large than when the number is small. For example, the determination range of the variation category “PA1” may be wider in the table 3 when the total number of reserved memories is 4 to 8 than the table 1 when the total number of reserved memories is 1. In addition, when the number of reserved memories is small, the variation categories “PA4” and “PA5” may be determined more easily than when the number is large.

  When the current gaming state is a normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “third big hit (10R normal)” (Step S409), one of the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” shown in FIG. 6 is determined according to the total number of reserved storage. That is, the CPU 103 first selects any one of the plurality of variation category determination tables in which different determination values are assigned to the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” according to the total number of reserved storage. Select the change category determination table. For example, when there is a table 4 when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2, and a table 5 when the total number of reserved memories is 3 to 8, the CPU 103 calculates the total from the tables 4 and 5 Select the table corresponding to the number of pending storage. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table compares the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table with the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 extracted in step S303 of FIG. Thus, any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined. Further, when the number of reserved memories is small, the variation categories “PB4” and “PB5” may be easily determined as compared with the case where the number is large. For example, the table 4 when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2 has a determination range of the variation categories “PB4” and “PB5” compared to the table 5 when the total number of reserved memories is 3 to 8. It may be wide. That is, the number of determination values assigned to the variation categories “PB4” and “PB5” may be increased. The same applies to other jackpot types.

  When the current gaming state is the normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit (10R probability change)” (Step S409), one of the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” shown in FIG. 6 is determined according to the total number of reserved storage. That is, the CPU 103 first selects any one of the plurality of variation category determination tables in which different determination values are assigned to the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” according to the total number of reserved storage. Select the change category determination table. For example, when there is a table 6 when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2, and a table 7 when the total number of reserved memories is 3 to 8, the CPU 103 determines the total from the tables 6 and 7 Select the table corresponding to the number of pending storage. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table compares the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table with the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 extracted in step S303 of FIG. Thus, any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined.

  When the current gaming state is a normal state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit (15R probability change)” (Step S409), one of the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” shown in FIG. 6 is determined according to the total number of reserved storage. That is, the CPU 103 first selects any one of the plurality of variation category determination tables in which different determination values are assigned to the variation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” according to the total number of reserved storage. Select the change category determination table. For example, when there is a table 8 when the total number of reserved memories is 1 or 2, and a table 9 when the total number of reserved memories is 3 to 8, the CPU 103 calculates the total from the tables 8 and 9 Select the table corresponding to the number of pending storage. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table compares the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table with the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 extracted in step S303 of FIG. Thus, any one of the fluctuation categories “PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5” is determined.

  When the current game state is a probability change state (when the current game state is identified as a probability change state in step S401), and when it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” ( In step S404; No), one of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” shown in FIG. 7 is determined. That is, the CPU 103 first selects a predetermined variation category determination table (for example, the table 10) in which the determination value is assigned to each of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD”. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table (for example, the table 10) shows the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table and the random value MR3 for determination of the variation category extracted in step S303 in FIG. By comparing with numerical data, one of the variation categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” is determined.

  As in the case where the current gaming state is the normal state, the variable categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD” are used according to the total reserved memory number, using a plurality of variable category determination tables corresponding to the total reserved memory number. "PA-KD" may be determined. When the mode of determining any one of the variable categories “PA-T”, “PA-JD”, and “PA-KD” according to the total number of reserved memories, the variable category when the number of reserved memories is small is larger than when the number is large. “PA-JD” or “PA-KD” may be easily determined.

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “third big hit (10R normal)” (Step S409), it is determined which of the fluctuation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL” shown in FIG. That is, the CPU 103 first selects a predetermined variation category determination table (for example, the table 11) in which a determination value is assigned to each of the variation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL”. The CPU 103 that has selected the variation category determination table (for example, the table 11) shows the determination value of each variation category in the variation category determination table and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category extracted in step S303 in FIG. By comparing with the numerical data, it is determined which of the fluctuation categories “PB-JL” and “PB-KL”.

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “second big hit (10R probability change)” (Step S409), the variation category “PB-JW” shown in FIG. 7 is determined. That is, the CPU 103 may select a predetermined variation category determination table (for example, the table 12) in which all determination values (“0” to “99”) are assigned to the variation category “PB-JW”.

  When the current gaming state is a probable change state, it is determined that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S403; Yes), and the big hit type is determined to be “first big hit (15R probability change)” (Step S409), the variation category “PB-KW” shown in FIG. 7 is determined. That is, the CPU 103 may select a predetermined variation category determination table (for example, the table 13) in which all determination values (“0” to “99”) are assigned to the variation category “PB-KW”.

  In addition, when it is determined that “the second big hit (10R probability change)”, any of the fluctuation categories “PB-JW” and “PB-JW” may be determined. Further, when it is determined that “first big hit (15R probability change)”, any of the fluctuation categories “PB-JW” and “PB-JW” may be determined. Whether it is determined to be “second big hit (10R probability change)” or “first big hit (15R probability change)”, it is determined whether the variation category is “PB-JW” or “PB-JW”. In this case, when it is determined that it is “second big hit (10R probability variation)”, the variation category “PB-JW” is more easily determined than when it is determined that it is “first big hit (15R probability variation)”. When it is determined that the “first big hit (15R probability change)” is determined, the variation category “PB-KW” is more easily determined than when it is determined that the second big hit (10R probability change). Also good.

  In FIG. 6, “P” is the probability of jackpot in the normal state and corresponds to “p1” in FIG. “X”, “y”, and “z” are distributions (rates) of the big hit type at the big hit in the normal state, and are the same as “x”, “y”, and “z” in FIG. 8C. is there. That is, “x” + “y” + “z” is 1.

  In FIG. 6, “h1”, “h2”, “h3”, “h4”, and “h5” are variation categories (“PA1”, “PA2”, “PA3”) that can be determined when “lost” in the normal state. “PA4” and “PA5”) are the ratios determined in step S412 described above. “H1” + “h2” + “h3” + “h4” + “h5” = 1. Here, as described above, the determination ratios of the variation categories “PA1” to “PA5” differ depending on the total number of reserved storage, but here, the reliability of reach production such as super reach α and super reach β What is necessary is just to let the judgment ratio appropriate in comparing "h1" to "h5". For example, “h1” to “h5” may be values in a specific total reserved memory number. A typical (typical) total reserved memory number may be used as the specific total reserved memory number. When the typical total reserved memory number is 2, the total reserved memory number is 2 or 3. In the variation category determination table (the above-described table 2), the allocation ratios of the determination values to the variation categories “PA1” to “PA5” are “h1” to “h5”. Further, a statistical value, for example, a value taking into account a variation in the total number of reserved memories may be “h1” to “h5”. As an example, the allocation rate of determination values to variation categories “PA1” to “PA5” in Table 1, the allocation rate of determination values to variation categories “PA1” to “PA5” in Table 2, and the variation category in Table 3 An average of the allocation ratios of judgment values to “PA1” to “PA5” with a coefficient that takes into consideration the selection ratio of each table (distribution of the total number of pending storages) (or a simple average value) , “H1” to “h5”.

  In FIG. 6, “a1” to “a3” are the above-described variation categories (“PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5”) that can be determined when “third big hit (10R normal)” is obtained. The ratio determined in step S412. “A1” + “a2” + “a3” = 1. In addition, as with the respective determination ratios of the fluctuation categories “PA1” to “PA5”, the determination ratios of the fluctuation categories “PB3” to “PB5” also differ depending on the total number of reserved storage, but the above “h1”. As in the case of “h5”, an appropriate determination ratio may be set to “a1” to “a3” in comparing the reliability of reach production such as super reach α and super reach β. For example, regarding the variation categories “PA1” to “PA5”, when the allocation ratios of the determination values in the table 2 corresponding to the above-described total number of reserved storages are “h1” to “h5”, the variation category “PB3” ”To“ PB5 ”, the allocation ratios of determination values in the table 4 corresponding to two total pending storage numbers may be“ a1 ”to“ a3 ”.

  In FIG. 6, “a4”, “a5”, and “a6” are variation categories (“PB3”, “PB4”, “PB5”) that can be determined when “second big hit (10R probability variation)” is obtained in the normal state. Each is the ratio determined in step S412. “A4” + “a5” + “a6” = 1. Note that, as in the case of “a1” to “a3” described above, an appropriate determination ratio may be set to “a4” to “a6” in comparing the reliability of reach effects such as super reach α and super reach β.

  In FIG. 6, “a7”, “a8”, and “a9” are fluctuation categories (“PB3”, “PB4”, and “PB5”) that can be determined when “first big hit (15R probability variation)” is obtained in the normal state. Each is the ratio determined in step S412. “A7” + “a8” + “a9” = 1. Note that, as in the case of “a1” to “a3” described above, an appropriate determination ratio may be set to “a7” to “a9” in comparing the reliability of reach effects such as super reach α and super reach β.

  In FIG. 6, the determination rate of the variation category “PA3” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PA3-X”, which is referred to as “R1”) is (1−P) × h3. The determination rate of the variation category “PA4” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PA4-X”, which is “R2”) is (1−P) × h4. The determination rate of the variation category “PA5” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PA5-X”, which is referred to as “R3”) is (1−P) × h5. The determination rate of the variation category “PB3” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PB3-X”, which is “R4”) is (P × xx × a7) + (P × y × a4) + (P × z × a1). ). The determination rate of the fluctuation category “PB4” (appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern “PB4-X”, “R5”) is (P × xx × a8) + (P × y × a5) + (P × z × a2). ). The determination rate of the fluctuation category “PB5” (the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern “PB5-X”, which is assumed to be “R6”) is (P × xx × a9) + (P × y × a6) + (P × z × a3). ). Therefore, the appearance rate of “normal reach” (referred to as “R7”) is R1 + R4. The appearance rate of “super reach α” (referred to as “R8”) is R2 + R5. The appearance rate of “super reach β” (referred to as “R9”) is R3 + R6. The reliability of “normal reach” (referred to as “R10”) is R4 / R7. The reliability of “super reach α” (referred to as “R11”) is R5 / R8. The reliability of “super reach β” (referred to as “R12”) is R6 / R9.

  Although it has been described that the degree of expectation of jackpot is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach, specifically, reliability of “super reach β” (R12)> reliability of “super reach α” (R11) > The reliability (R10) of “normal reach”. That is, a plurality of variable category determination tables (for example, tables) such that “superreach β” reliability (R12)> “superreach α” reliability (R11)> “normal reach” reliability (R10). 1 to Table 9) are set with determination values.

  In FIG. 7, “P” is a jackpot probability in the probability variation state and corresponds to “p3” in FIG. “X”, “y”, and “z” are distributions (rates) of the big hit type at the big hit in the probability variation state, and are the same as “x”, “y”, and “z” in FIG. is there. That is, “x” + “y” + “z” is 1.

  In FIG. 7, “d1”, “d2”, and “d3” are variation categories (“PA-T”, “PA-JD”, “PA-JD”) that can be determined when “lost” in the probability variation state. Each is the ratio determined in step S412 described above. “D1” + “d2” + “d3” = 1.

  In FIG. 7, “l1” and “l3” are the fluctuation categories (“PB-JL” and “PB-KL”) that can be determined when “third big hit (10R normal)” in the probability variation state, This is the ratio determined in step S412. “L1” + “l2” = 1.

  In FIG. 7, “w1” is the ratio at which the variation category (“PB-JW”) that can be determined when “second big hit (10R probability variation)” is determined in the probability variation state is determined in step S412. “W1” = 1.

  In FIG. 7, “w2” is a ratio at which the variation category (“PB-KW”) that can be determined when “first big hit (15R probability variation)” is determined in the probability variation state is determined in step S412. “W2” = 1.

  In FIG. 7, the determination rate of the variation category “PA-JD” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PA-JD-X”, “R21”) is (1−P) × d2. The determination rate of the variation category “PA-KD” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PA-KD-X”, “R22”) is (1−P) × d3. The determination rate of the variation category “PB-JL” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PB-JL-X”, which is “R23”) is P × z × l1. The determination rate of the variation category “PB-KL” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PB-KL-X”, which is “R24”) is P × z × l2. The determination rate of the variation category “PB-JW” (the appearance rate of the variation pattern “PB-JW-X”, which is “R25”) is P × y × w1. The determination rate of the fluctuation category “PB-KW” (the appearance rate of the fluctuation pattern “PB-KW-X”, which is “R26”) is P × xx × w2. Therefore, the appearance rate of the weak enemy battle (referred to as “R27”) is R21 + R23 + R25. The appearance rate of the strong enemy battle (referred to as “R28”) is R22 + R24 + R26. The negative rate (referred to as “R29”) when a weak enemy battle appears is R23 / R27. The negative rate (referred to as “R30”) when a strong enemy battle appears is R24 / R28. The win rate (referred to as “R31”) when a weak enemy battle appears is R25 / R27. The win rate (referred to as “R32”) when a strong enemy battle appears is R26 / R28.

  We explained that a strong enemy battle is a disadvantageous production that is easier to lose than a weak enemy battle, and that a weak enemy battle is an advantageous production that is easier to win than a strong enemy battle. Negative rate when it appears (R30)> Negative rate when a weak enemy battle appears (R29), and Win rate when a weak enemy battle appears (R31)> Win rate when a strong enemy battle appears (R32) It is said. That is, the negative rate when a strong enemy battle appears (R30)> the negative rate when a weak enemy battle appears (R29), and the winning rate when a weak enemy battle appears (R31)> when a strong enemy battle appears The determination values are set in a plurality of variation category determination tables (for example, Table 10 to Table 13) so that the winning rate (R32) is obtained.

  Then, after setting for transmitting any of the variation category commands according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S412 to the effect control board 12 (step S413), the random number determination at the time of winning The process ends. Specifically, transmission of a variation category command corresponding to the variation category determined in the process of step S412 is set. Note that, as shown in FIG. 16B, different EXT data is set for each of the variation categories (“PA1” to “PA5”, “PB3” to “PA5”) that can be determined in the normal state. . Although illustration is omitted, variation categories (“PA-T”, “PA-JD”, “PA-KD”, “PB-JL”, “PB-KL”, “PB-”) that can be determined in the probability variation state. Different EXT data is set for each of “JW” and “PB-KW”).

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 13, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Done. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance. The special symbol normal process will be described later.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, a variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types, a game state designation command, a first variation start command (or a second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification A transmission setting process for transmitting commands and the like is included. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable symbol special display is started, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2”. The variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. The first special symbol game (special game using the first special symbol) by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol game (special game using the second special symbol) by the second special symbol display device 4B The elapsed time is measured by a common timer regardless of whether the game is a graphic game). It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. In this way, the special symbol variation process of step S112 only needs to be a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B changes the special symbol based on the value of the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. Is included, and a setting for stopping and displaying (deriving) a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol is included. For example, when the big hit flag is on, a big hit start production waiting time is set, and a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 is performed. Thereafter, the big hit flag is updated to OFF (cleared), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. When the big hit flag is off and the small hit flag is on, a small hit start stage effect waiting time is set, and a hit start designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Settings for sending are made. Thereafter, the small hit flag is updated to OFF (cleared), and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. In addition, when control (for example, control of the number of STs and the number of time reductions, etc.) which changes a game state according to the number of special figure games is required, in the special symbol stop process, the game control counter setting part 154 is performed. The gaming value may be controlled by subtracting 1 (or adding 1) from the count value of a predetermined counter provided in.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big prize opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. include. At this time, for example, a setting corresponding to the jackpot type may be made. For example, during the execution of the “3rd big hit” round, the prize winning door (or the specific member) is controlled so that the game ball cannot pass (enter) into the specific member or is difficult to pass (enter) ( For example, a period during which the grand prize winning opening is opened) is set so that the game ball can pass (enter) a specific member during the execution of the “first big hit” or “second big hit” round (or pass ( The special winning opening door (or specific member) is controlled so that it is easy to enter. As a result, if the player is playing as instructed, if the jackpot type is “third jackpot”, it will be “big jackpot” of “non-probable change” and the jackpot type will be “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” "Is a" big hit "of" probability change ". When the big hit release pre-processing is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, after performing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. .

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, processing for setting to transmit a jackpot end designation command is included. When the number of round executions has not reached the maximum value of the number of times of winning the special winning opening, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. The value of the process flag is updated to “7”.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, various settings are made to wait until the waiting time corresponding to the period during which the ending effect is executed, and to start the probability change control and the time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. The processing to perform is included. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the big hit type of this “big hit” determined from the big hit type buffer value is “first big hit (15R probability variation)”, “second”. When it is a big hit (10R probability change), the probability change flag is updated to ON (probability change state) (originally it remains ON when it is ON), and the big hit type of this "big hit" is "third big hit If (10R normal) ", the probability variation flag is updated to off (non-probability variation state) (originally, when it is off, it remains off). Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. The pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit game state based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”. As an example, when the variable display result is “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is the same as when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. Setting to “0.1 seconds” and setting the number of times of opening of the big winning opening to “15 times” may be performed so that the small hit gaming state is set. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process waits until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which an effect operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, or the lamp 9. Processing to be included. Here, when the small hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the probability variation flag. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the total number of reserved memories is “0” (step S230). For example, in the process of step S230, the total pending storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read and it may be determined whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the total number of reserved memories is other than “0” in step S230 (step S230; No), is the first reserved information (holding data) that is digested first, that is, whether the oldest holding information is the second holding information? It is determined whether or not (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, it is determined whether or not the information stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” in the hold specifying information storage unit 151C is information indicating that the hold information is the second hold information. What is necessary is just to judge.

  When the hold information digested first in step S231 is the second hold information (step S231; Yes), the second hold information digested first, specifically, in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B. Then, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in correspondence with the hold number “1” are read out (step S232). The read numerical data may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value by 1, etc., the second special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the second special figure reserved memory is also updated. The hold information (numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3) stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151B is 1 The entry is shifted upward (step S233). In the process of step S233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved storage number count value stored in the total reserved storage number counter by one. Subsequent to the processing in step S233, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the hold information digested first in step S231 is not the second hold information (step S231; No), that is, when the hold information digested first is the first hold information, the first digested first. Hold information, specifically, numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, which is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A corresponding to the hold number “1”, and determining the jackpot type Each of the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 is read (step S236). The read numerical data may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating the first special figure reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The hold information (numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3) stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entry corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the unit 151A is 1 The entries are shifted up by one (step S237). In the process of step S237, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 151C is shifted up by one entry. Also, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 updates the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. Following the processing of step S237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S234 and S238, a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the gaming state is selected as in the process in step S402 shown in FIG. 16A (step S239). Following the process of step S239, a special figure display result is determined (step S240). For example, numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result within the determination range of any special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table selected in the process of step S239 (read out in step S232, What is necessary is just to determine whether there is numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the fluctuation random number buffer, and determining the special figure display result.

  After determining the special figure display result in step S240, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S241). If it is determined that the game is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). Subsequently, as in the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 16A, a jackpot type determination table corresponding to a variation special chart is selected from a plurality of jackpot type determination tables. Select (step S243). Note that, as a variable special figure, the start port buffer value (“1” or “2”) is used in the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 16A, but in the process of step S243, the variable special figure is specified. The buffer value (“1” or “2”) is used. However, in the case of the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the case where the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2” is the same as in FIG. Select the jackpot type determination table. Subsequent to the process of step S243, the jackpot type is determined in the same manner as the process of step S409 shown in FIG. 16A (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the jackpot type determined in step S245 is “third jackpot” leading to “non-probable change”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “0”, and the jackpot type determined in step S245 is “probable change”. In the case of “first big hit” or “second big hit” leading to “,” the big hit type buffer value may be set to “1”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  When it is determined in step S246 that it is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after executing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, the special figure display determined in the process in step S240. In the case of a big hit, a confirmed special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in step S244 (step S248). After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. .

  When the total number of reserved memories is “0” in step S230 (step S230; Yes), a predetermined demonstration display setting is performed (step S250), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 determines the variation category in the same manner as in step S412 shown in FIG. 16A (step S261). In the process of step S261, the CPU 103 newly extracts numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the changing category, and uses the numerical data indicating the newly extracted random value MR3 for determining the changing category to use the changing category. Or the fluctuations already extracted at the time of winning (step S303 in FIG. 15) and stored as the hold information in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A (or the second special figure hold storage unit 151B) The variation category may be determined using numerical data indicating the category determining random value MR3. Whether the numerical data stored as the hold information is used or the newly extracted numerical data is used, it corresponds to the number of reserved memories at the time of executing the variation pattern setting process. Based on the variation category determination table, a variation category corresponding to the number of reserved memories at the start of the variation is determined.

  Subsequent to the process of step S261, a variation pattern corresponding to the random number MR5 for determining the variation pattern is determined (step S262). In the process of step S262, the CPU 103 first selects one of the variation pattern determination tables corresponding to the variation category determined in step S261 from the plurality of variation pattern determination tables. For example, when the variation category “PB3” is determined in step S261, a determination value is assigned to each of the variation patterns (“PB3-1” and “PB3-2”) that are the variation pattern “PB3-X”. When the variation category determination table is selected and the variation category “PB-JL” is determined in step S261, a determination value is set for each of the plurality of variation patterns having the variation pattern “PB-JL-X”. Select the assigned variation pattern determination table. Subsequently, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR5 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 or the game control counter setting unit 154, and determines the selected variation pattern. It is determined whether there is numerical data indicating the extracted random number MR5 for determining a variation pattern within the determination range of any variation pattern in the table. That is, in the process of step S262, a variation pattern corresponding to the variation category is determined. In other words, when the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), special figure display result, number of reserved memories, and special figure display result are big hits, a variation pattern corresponding to the big hit type is further determined.

  Then, the special figure fluctuation time according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S262 is set (step S263). Thereafter, a setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start either the first special figure game or the second special figure game in accordance with the variable special figure designation buffer value (step S264). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

After the process of step S264 is performed, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol variable display are performed (step S265). The various commands set in this way are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example, by executing the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. . Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step S266), and then the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 19 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, control that becomes an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command captured at this time is stored, for example, in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process in step S75, for example, various effect devices such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speaker 8, a light emission operation in the lamp 9, and a drive operation in the effect model. The contents of the control of the effect operation using the are determined, determined, set according to the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data indicating is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S74 of FIG. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first receives a command received from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is (step S501). At this time, if there is no received command (step S501; No), the command analysis processing is terminated.

  If there is a received command in step S501 (step S501; Yes), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start opening prize designation command. (Step S502). If it is the first start opening winning designation command (step S502; Yes), the first reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S503). For example, in the process of step S503, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the first pending storage number notification command is set in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192. That's fine.

  If the received command is not the first start opening winning designation command in step S502 (step S502; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step S504). If it is the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; Yes), the second reserved storage number notification waiting time is set (step S505). For example, in the process of step S505, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the reception waiting time of the second pending storage number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not the second start opening winning designation command (step S504; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a symbol designation command (step S506). If the received command is not a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; No), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step S507). If the received command is not a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step S508). When the command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S508; Yes), the first pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S509). .

  If the received command is not the first reserved memory number notification command in step S508 (step S508; No), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved memory number notification command (step S510). When the command is the second pending storage count notification command (step S510; Yes), the second pending storage count notification waiting time is cleared by, for example, initializing the timing operation by the command reception control timer (step S511). .

  If the received command is a symbol designating command in step S506 (step S506; Yes), the received command is a variable category command in step S507 (step S507; Yes), or steps S503, S505, S509, and S511. After executing any of the above processes, the received command is stored at the head of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 194A (step S512), and the process returns to the step S501.

  In addition, when the pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with the variation start command (first variation start command or second variation start command), the retention storage is performed. The number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. That is, it is only necessary that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the empty area in the start winning receiving command buffer 194A.

  If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step S510 (step S510; No), after making settings according to other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  Start opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category command, reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command, second reserved memory number) An effect control command received from the main board 11 when a start winning is generated, such as a notification command, is also referred to as a command at the time of starting winning. The reserved memory number notification command and the start opening winning designation command are also referred to as reserved memory information. The symbol designation command and the variation category command are also referred to as determination result information. Note that when receiving commands are sequentially stored from the top of the empty area in the start winning reception command buffer 194A, the received command is any one of a start winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count notification command. May be stored without distinction, or each received command may be distinguished and stored at the head of the free area in the corresponding storage area.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process executed in step S75 of FIG. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a start winning determination process (step S150). FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S150 of FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 194A (step S151), and uses a start opening winning designation command (first check) as a new received command. It is determined whether or not a start opening winning designation command or a second starting opening winning designation command has been received (step S152). When it is determined in step S151 that a new reception command has not been received (step S152; No), the start winning determination process is terminated. When the start opening winning designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 11B, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the reserved memory count notification command are also received.

  If it is determined in step S151 that a new reception command has been received (step S152; Yes), a hold display mode determination process is executed (step S162). In the hold display mode determination process in step S162, the display mode of the hold information by the start winning is determined. When determining the display mode of the hold information by the start winning, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating the determined display mode in the prefetch notice buffer 194B. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 stores information indicating the determined display mode in association with the buffer number of the pre-read notice buffer 194B corresponding to the winning buffer number. In the hold display mode determination process in step S162, whether or not the hold information by the start winning is set as the hold information of the target, or when the hold information by the start win is set as the hold information of the target The effect mode of the notice effect is also determined, and the determined content is stored in the prefetch notice buffer 194B.

  After executing the hold display mode determination process (step S162), the effect control CPU 120 executes a hold addition process (step S163). In the hold addition process in step S163, a hold display is added based on the determination content of the hold display mode determination process (step S162). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 stores the start winning memory display area 5H in accordance with the information indicating the display mode stored in association with the buffer number of the prefetching advance notice buffer 194B corresponding to the winning buffer number. Add hold display. Then, the start winning determination process (step S150) is terminated.

  After the start winning determination process of step S150 shown in FIGS. 21 and 22 is executed, for example, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, steps S170 to S170 shown in FIG. One of the processes in S177 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is an initial value. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether a first variation start command (or second variation start command), a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main board 11 are received. This includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the display device 5. When it is determined that the decorative symbol variable display is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, This includes processing for determining an effect control pattern based on the result notification command. For example, it includes processing for determining a final stop symbol in variable display, a main notice effect, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”. The variable display start setting process will be described later.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect process during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, based on the effect control pattern determined in the variable display start setting process. Various control data are read out, and various effect control (for example, decorative display variable display control during decorative display variable display) is performed. Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a video signal (effect image) to the image display device 5 based on the read control data and displays it on the screen, and outputs an effect sound signal to the audio control board 13. Then, various kinds of effect control such as control for outputting the effect sound from the speaker 8 and control for turning on / off / flashing the lamp 9 by outputting the illumination signal to the lamp control board 14 are executed. After performing such effect control, for example, it corresponds to the fact that the end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or that the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Then, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed. If the final decorative design is displayed in a complete stop in response to the end code being read from the production control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. Even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the confirmed decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the definitive decorative symbol is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. Further, when the production control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hit effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, reads various control data based on the set content, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect processing, various effect controls in the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting video signals, effect sound signals, electrical decoration signals, and the like. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and reads various control data based on the set contents, and in step S172 Similar to the variable display effect process, various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electrical decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot gaming state, reads various control data based on the set contents, and performs variable display in step S172. Similar to the medium effect process, various effect controls in the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, etc., reads various control data based on the set contents, and is performing variable display in step S172. Similar to the effect process, various effect controls at the end of the big hit gaming state are executed by outputting a video signal, an effect sound signal, an electric decoration signal, and the like. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 23, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S701). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S701; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the designated variation pattern is read. Is a non-reach variation pattern (for example, “PA1-X” or “PA-TX”) corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S702). ).

  If it is determined in step S702 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S702; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S703). As an example, in the process of step S703, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C of the image display device 5 among the fixed decorative symbols is determined. In the process of step S703, a determined decorative symbol of a non-reach combination that becomes a predetermined chance symbol symbol may be determined in response to the case where the variable symbol notice is being executed.

  If it is determined in step S703 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S703; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S704). As an example, in the process of step S704, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Further, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table, etc., a decorative symbol having the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc. of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. To do. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not a jackpot combination but a reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S701 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S701; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S705). When it is determined to be “accuracy” or “small hit” (step S705; Yes), for example, a definite decoration that becomes a final stop symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or “small hit”, such as an opening chance. A combination of symbols is determined (step S706). In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is only necessary to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute any of the opening chance eyes by referring to.

  If it is determined in step S705 that it is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” or “small hit” (step S705; No), the final decorative symbol that becomes the final stop symbol constituting the big hit combination is displayed. A combination is determined (step S707). As an example, in the process of step S707, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a jackpot determined symbol updated by a random counter of the production control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table, etc., the decorative symbol with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. . At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, and whether or not there is a promotion effect during the big hit, it may be determined that a different decorative symbol is determined as a final decorative symbol. Good.

  As a specific example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, any one of the plural types of normal symbols is selected and determined as the definite decorative symbol constituting the non-probable variation jackpot combination. That's fine. When the jackpot type is “probable variation”, any one decorative symbol is selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols or probability variation symbols, and a definite ornament symbol pattern that constitutes a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a probability variation jackpot combination is selected. You just have to decide. At this time, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of a non-probability variable jackpot combination, a notification that it will be controlled to a promiscuous state is not performed in the re-drawing effect during variable display, and is executed corresponding to the jackpot gaming state. What is necessary is just to alert | report that it is controlled to a probable change state by the promotion effect during a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be a definite decorative combination of probability variation big hit combination, a notification that control is made to the probability variation state is performed in the re-lottery effect during variable display or without executing the re-lottery effect.

  After performing any of the processes of steps S703, S704, S706, and S707, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (step S710). In the effect control pattern setting process in step S710, a determination process for determining the effect stage, the main notice effect, and the like, an effect control pattern corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command, the determination content of the determination process, and the like. It includes setting processing for setting as usage patterns. Details of the effect control pattern setting process will be described later.

  After performing the effect control pattern setting process (step S710), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold digest process (step S713). Specifically, when the decoration pattern starts to change in conjunction with the first special game or the second special game, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning memory display area 5H is changed to the variable display. The area is shifted to an area for displaying a corresponding hold display (not shown in FIG. 1; also referred to as a current display area or a digest display area), and when there is another hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H, the other hold is displayed. The display is shifted in the start winning storage display area 5H. Note that the hold display in the current display area may be deleted when the variable display is started, executed, or ended.

  After executing the pending digest process (step S713), for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command ( Step S714). Subsequently, a change display start setting process for making a setting for starting the change of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 is executed (step S715). For example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern set as the use pattern in the effect control pattern setting process (step S710) is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The speaker 8 is transmitted by setting the setting for starting the variation of the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5 or transmitting the effect sound signal specified by the sound control data included in the effect control pattern to the sound control board 13. Setting for starting sound output in the lamp 9 and setting for starting light emission in the lamp 9 by transmitting an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data included in the effect control pattern to the lamp control board 14. I do.

  After the processing of step S715 is executed, the command stored in the start winning reception command buffer 194A is digested (step S716). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number, and in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the deleted command. The stored commands are shifted while maintaining the winning order. In the process of step S716, the information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 194B is deleted or shifted in accordance with the deletion or shift of the command in the start winning reception command buffer 194A. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S718), and the variable display start setting process (step S171) ends.

  Next, the main notice effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) will be described. In the normal stage (Noyama stage), when the main notice effect is not executed, when the “normal stage serif effect” is executed as the main notice effect, and “step-up effect for the normal stage” is executed as the main notice effect. In some cases, “normal stage dialogue production” and “normal stage step-up production” are executed as the main notice production.

  “Normal stage serif effect” is an effect of displaying words (words) suitable for the normal stage in the display area of the display device 5 when decorative symbols are variably displayed on the normal stage (Noyama stage). . Specifically, the first character's dialogue is displayed, and the second character's dialogue is displayed in response to the player's operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B). Note that the “normal stage serif effect” may be used to notify that the degree of expectation of the big hit is high as in the case of the reach effect, “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and the like. For example, as a line having high reliability, a line including a character “heat” or a line of a specific color (for example, red) may be displayed.

  “Normal stage step-up effect” is a display device that displays images (still images, moving images) suitable for the normal stage when the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the normal stage (Noyama stage) or when it is variably displayed. This is an effect of sequentially displaying in 5 display areas. Note that the “normal stage step-up effect” may be a notification that the jackpot expectation is high, as in the case of the reach effect, “slip”, “pseudo-run”, and the like. For example, the greater the number of step-ups, the higher the reliability.

  In the special stage (underwater stage), the types of main notice effects that can be executed differ depending on whether or not the selection effects are executed. The selection effect is an effect that allows the player to select whether or not to switch the effect in the effect mode to another effect when the effect is executed in a certain effect mode. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), in the special stage (underwater stage), the player determines whether or not to shift from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage). A selectable effect is a selectable effect. In the selection effect, a switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is accepted from the player as a selection to shift from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage). The selection effect is also referred to as a cancellation effect in order to cancel the current effect mode (for example, the current stage).

  If you do not execute the selected effect on the special stage, if you do not execute the main notice effect, if you execute the "special stage serif effect" as the main notice effect, and "special stage step-up" as the main notice effect There are cases where “special stage serif effects” and “special stage step-up” are executed as main notice effects. When executing the selection effect on the special stage, there are a case where the main notice effect is not executed and a case where “step up for special stage” is executed as the main notice effect. That is, the “special stage serif effect” can be executed when the selection effect is not executed, but cannot be executed when the selection effect is executed.

  The “special stage dialogue effect” is an effect of displaying words (words) suitable for the special stage in the display area of the display device 5 when the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the special stage (underwater stage). . Specifically, the first character's dialogue is displayed, and the second character's dialogue is displayed in response to the player's operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B). Note that the “special stage serif effect” may be a notification that the expectation level of the big hit is high as in the case of the “normal stage serif effect”.

  “Special stage step-up effect” is a display device that displays images (still images, moving images) suitable for special stages, such as when decorative symbols are variably displayed on a special stage (underwater stage) or when variably displayed. This is an effect of sequentially displaying in 5 display areas. Note that the “special stage step-up effect” may be a notification indicating that the degree of big hit expectation is high, as in the case of the “normal stage step-up effect”.

  FIG. 24A shows the determination ratio of the main notice effect in the normal stage (the determination ratio of the main notice effect based on the main notice effect pattern determination tables A and B (not shown)). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 selects a main notice effect pattern as shown in FIG. 24A in the process of step S741 (described later) in FIG.

  In FIG. 24A, “e11” is a rate at which the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” is determined (determined). The main notice effect pattern “N-P1” is a main notice effect pattern that does not execute the main notice effect. “E12” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “N-P2” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “N-P2” is a main notice effect pattern that executes a “normal stage dialogue effect”. “E13” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “N-P3” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “N-P3” is a main notice effect pattern that executes a “step-up effect for a normal stage”. “E14” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “N-P4” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “N-P4” is a main notice effect pattern that executes “normal stage dialog effect” and “normal stage step-up effect”. “E11” + “e12” + “e13” + “e14” = 1.

  The ROM 121 determines (determines) any main notice effect pattern from the four kinds of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” to “N-P4”) shown in FIG. Two types of main notice effect pattern determination tables (main notice effect pattern determination table A and main notice effect pattern determination table B) are stored as main notice effect pattern determination tables.

The determination ratio “e11” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A is the four main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” to “N-P”) in the main notice effect pattern determination table A. P4 "), the main notice effect pattern" N- "for the number of determination values (numbers compared with a random number value (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table A). This is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to “P1”. For example, the main in informational display pattern determination table A, the main announcement attraction pattern number is _one A decision value assigned to the "N-P1", the number of judgment values assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern "N-P2" is A _2, the main announcement attraction pattern number determination value is _three a assigned to the "N-P3 ', when the number of judgment values assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern" N-P4 "is _four a, main notice The determination ratio “e11” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P1” based on the effect pattern determination table A is A ₁ / (A ₁ + A ₂ + A ₃ + A ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e12” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P2” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A is a determination value assigned to any of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table A. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “N-P2”. For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table A, the number of main announcement attraction pattern "N-P1 '~ decision value assigned to each of the" N-P4 "is, as described above, _one A, ₂ pieces A, A _3, if there are _{four a,} main announcement attraction pattern determination table a main informational display pattern by the "N-P2" decision ratio "e12" _of, the _{a 2 / (a 1 + a} 2 + a 3 + a 4) . Similarly, the determination ratio “e13” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A is A ₃ / (A ₁ + A ₂ + A ₃ + A ₄ ). Further, the determination ratio “e14” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P4” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A is A ₄ / (A ₁ + A ₂ + A ₃ + A ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e11” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” according to the main notice effect pattern determination table B is a determination value (main value) assigned to any of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table B. This is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” to the number of random numbers for determining the main notice effect pattern (not shown) in the notice effect pattern determination table B. . For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table B, ₁ piece number determination value assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern "N-P1" is B, the number of main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the "N-P2" is B _2, the main announcement attraction pattern number of judgment values assigned to the "N-P3 'are _three B, and the number of judgment values assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern" N-P4 "is _four B, main notice The determination ratio “e11” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P1” based on the effect pattern determination table B is B ₁ / (B ₁ + B ₂ + B ₃ + B ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e12” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P2” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table B is a determination value assigned to one of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table B. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “N-P2”. For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table B, the number of main announcement attraction pattern "N-P1 '~ decision value assigned to each of the" N-P4 "is, as described above, _one B, ₂ pieces B, B _3, if there are _{four B,} main announcement attraction pattern determination table main announcement attraction pattern by B "N-P2" decision ratio "e12" _of, a _{B 2 / (B 1 + B} 2 + B 3 + B 4) . Similarly, the determination ratio “e13” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table B is B ₃ / (B ₁ + B ₂ + B ₃ + B ₄ ). Further, the determination ratio “e14” of the main notice effect pattern “N−P4” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table B is B ₄ / (B ₁ + B ₂ + B ₃ + B ₄ ).

  Further, the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table A is different from the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table B. Specifically, the determination ratio “e11” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the determination ratio “N-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table B “ “e11” is different or the main notice effect pattern “N-P2” is determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table “B” and the main notice effect effect pattern determination table “B” is determined. The ratio “e12” is different, or the determination ratio “e13” of the main notice effect pattern “N-P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the main notice effect pattern “N-P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table B Or the determination ratio of the main notice effect pattern “N-P4” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table A e14 ”differs from the decision ratio“ e14 ”of the main notice effect pattern“ N-P4 ”according to the main notice effect pattern determination table B, or at least one (in reality, only one may not be different, so at least two). I have to be different).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines any main notice effect pattern from the four types of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” to “N-P4”), first, the main notice effect pattern determination table A Then, one of the main notice effect pattern determination table B is selected. For example, one of the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the main notice effect pattern determination table B is selected according to the current game state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, and the like.

  As an example, the main notice effect pattern “N-P4” that executes both the “normal stage dialog effect” and the “normal stage step-up effect” is determined when the number of reserved memories is small compared to when the number is large. It may be made easier. For example, when “e14” in the main notice effect pattern determination table A> “e14” in the main notice effect pattern determination table B and the total number of reserved memories is one or two, the main notice effect pattern determination is performed. When the table A is always selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table A> the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table B), and the total number of reserved memories is three or more, the main notice effect pattern The determination table B may always be selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table A <the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table B).

  As another example, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, the main notice effect pattern “N-P1” that does not execute the main notice effect may be determined more easily than in the case of the non-reach change pattern. For example, when “e11” in the main notice effect pattern determination table B> “e11” in the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the non-reach variation pattern, the main notice effect pattern determination table B is always selected. (Or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table B> the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table A). , Selection ratio of main notice effect pattern determination table B <selection ratio of main notice effect pattern determination table A).

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table A is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table A, and in the main notice effect pattern determination table A, four types of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” ˜ By comparing the determination value assigned to any one of “N-P4”) and the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the main notice effect pattern according to the main notice effect pattern determination table A, four types of main notice effects are obtained. Determine one of the patterns. For example, when there is numerical data indicating the random number value within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notification effect pattern “N-P1” in the main notification effect pattern determination table A (within the determination range), the main notification effect pattern “ N-P1 ”is determined, and when the numerical data indicating the random number is within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notification effect pattern“ N-P2 ”in the main notification effect pattern determination table A, the main notification effect pattern When “N-P2” is determined and there is numerical data indicating the random number within the range of the judgment value assigned to the main notice effect pattern “N-P3” in the main notice effect pattern determination table A, the main notice effect The pattern “N-P3” is determined, and the random number value is within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notice effect pattern “N-P4” in the main notice effect pattern determination table A. If there is to numerical data to determine the main announcement attraction pattern "N-P4".

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table B is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table B, and in the main notice effect pattern determination table B, four types of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” ˜ By comparing the determination value assigned to any one of “N-P4”) and the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table B, the main notice effect pattern determination table As in the case of selecting A, one of the four types of main notice effect patterns is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the main notice effect pattern determination table B to execute the “normal stage serif effect”, the main notice effect pattern “NP2” or the main notice effect. When the pattern “N-P4” is determined, for example, a plurality of types for the normal stage stored in the ROM 121 according to the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, etc. From the line production (information about the line production), a set of lines consisting of the first line and the second line is selected.

  As an example, in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern or a big hit fluctuation pattern, it is based on words including a character “heat” or a character of a specific color (for example, red), compared to a case where it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern or a big hit fluctuation pattern. You may make it easy to select a line. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control has different determination values (random numbers (not shown) for determining a line for a normal stage) for each line group (the first line and the second line). Compared to the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern or big hit fluctuation pattern, the character “ The normal stage serif determination table in which more judgment values are assigned to serifs including “” or serifs of characters of a specific color (for example, red) may be selected.

  The CPU 120 for effect control uses the main notice effect pattern determination table A and the main notice effect pattern determination table B to execute the “normal stage step-up effect”, the main notice effect pattern “N-P3” or the main notice. When the production pattern “N-P4” is determined, for example, a plurality of types for the normal stage stored in the ROM 121 according to the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, etc. One of the step-up effects is selected from the step-up effects (information on the step-up effects).

  As an example, in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern or jackpot fluctuation pattern, a step-up effect with a larger number of step-ups (for example, a step in which the number of step ups is four steps) than in the case of no super reach fluctuation pattern or jackpot fluctuation pattern. It may be easy to select an up effect or the like. For example, the production control CPU 120 assigns to each of the step-up numbers a plurality of normal values assigned different determination values (numerical values to be compared with a random number for determining the step-up number for the normal stage (not shown)). From the stage step-up number determination table, if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern or big hit fluctuation pattern, it is more for step up effects with a larger number of step ups than if it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern or big hit fluctuation pattern The normal stage step-up number determination table to which the determination value is assigned may be selected.

  FIG. 24B shows the determination ratio of the main notice effect in the special stage (the determination ratio of the main notice effect based on the main notice effect pattern determination tables C and D (not shown)). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control selects a main notice effect pattern as shown in FIG. 24B in the process (described later) in step S811 of FIG.

  In FIG. 24B, “e21” is a rate at which the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” is determined (determined). The main notice effect pattern “S-P1” is a main notice effect pattern that does not execute the main notice effect. “E22” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “S-P2” is a main notice effect pattern that executes the “special stage serif effect”. “E23” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “S-P3” is a main notice effect pattern that executes “step-up effect for special stage”. “E24” is a ratio at which the main notice effect pattern “S-P4” is determined. The main notice effect pattern “S-P4” is a main notice effect pattern that executes “special stage serif effect” and “special stage step-up effect”. “E21” + “e22” + “e23” + “e24” = 1.

  The ROM 121 determines (determines) any main notice effect pattern from the four kinds of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) shown in FIG. Two types of main notice effect pattern determination tables (main notice effect pattern determination table C and main notice effect pattern determination table D) are stored as main notice effect pattern determination tables.

The determination ratio “e21” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C is the four main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P1”) in the main notice effect pattern determination table C. P4 "), the main notice effect pattern" S- "with respect to the number of determination values (a numerical value compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table C). This is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to “P1”. For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table C, the number of main announcement attraction pattern number of judgment values _one C assigned to the "S-P1", determined value assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern "S-P2" is C _2, the main announcement attraction pattern number determination value is _three C assigned to the "N-P3 ', when the number of judgment values assigned to the main announcement attraction pattern" N-P4 "is _four C, mainly notice The determination ratio “e21” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P1” based on the effect pattern determination table C is C ₁ / (C ₁ + C ₂ + C ₃ + C ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e22” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C is a determination value assigned to one of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table C. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P2”. For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table C, the number of main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to each of the "S-P1" - "S-P4" is, as described above, _one C, C ₂ pieces, C If _{3, 4 C,} the main subject determining a rate of the main announcement attraction pattern by effect pattern determination table C "S-P2,""e22" _are the _{C 2 / (C 1 + C} 2 + C 3 + C 4) . Similarly, the determination ratio “e23” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C is C ₃ / (C ₁ + C ₂ + C ₃ + C ₄ ). Further, the determination ratio “e24” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P4” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C is C ₄ / (C ₁ + C ₂ + C ₃ + C ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e21” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table D is a determination value (main value) assigned to any of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table D. This is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” to the number of random numbers (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern according to the notice effect pattern determination table D. . For example, the main subject in the demonstration pattern determination table D, the main announcement attraction pattern number is _one D decision value assigned to the "S-P1", the number of main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the "S-P2" D _2, the main announcement attraction pattern number determination value is _three D assigned to the "S-P3 ', when the number of main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the" S-P4 "is _four D, main notice The determination ratio “e21” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P1” based on the effect pattern determination table D is D ₁ / (D ₁ + D ₂ + D ₃ + D ₄ ).

The determination ratio “e22” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table D is a determination value assigned to one of the four main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table D. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P2”. For example, in the main announcement attraction pattern determination table D, the number of judgment values assigned to each of the main announcement attraction pattern "S-P1" - "S-P4" is, as described above, _one D, ₂ or D, D If _{3, 4 D,} main announcement attraction pattern determination table main announcement attraction pattern by D "S-P2" decision ratio "e22" _of, the _{D 2 / (D 1 + D} 2 + D 3 + D 4) . Similarly, the determination ratio “e23” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table D is D ₃ / (D ₁ + D ₂ + D ₃ + D ₄ ). Further, the determination ratio “e24” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P4” according to the main notice effect pattern determination table D is D ₄ / (D ₁ + D ₂ + D ₃ + D ₄ ).

  Further, the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table C is different from the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table D. Specifically, the determination ratio “e21” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C and the determination ratio “E-P1” of the main notice effect pattern determination table D “ “e21” is different or the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” is determined by the main notice effect pattern “Table 22” and the main notice effect pattern “Table 22” is determined. The ratio “e22” is different or the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” according to the main notice effect pattern determination table D and the decision ratio “e23” of the main notice effect pattern “SP3” according to the main notice effect pattern determination table C Or the determination ratio of the main notice effect pattern “S-P4” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table C. e24 ”differs from the decision ratio“ e24 ”of the main notice effect pattern“ S-P4 ”based on the main notice effect pattern determination table D, or at least one (in reality, only one may not be different, so at least two). I have to be different).

  When the CPU 120 for effect control determines any main notice effect pattern from four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”), first, the main notice effect pattern determination table C Then, one of the main notice effect pattern determination table D is selected. For example, one of the main notice effect pattern determination table C and the main notice effect pattern determination table D is selected according to the current game state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the change pattern, and the like.

  As an example, the main notice effect pattern “S-P4” that executes both “special stage dialog effect” and “special stage step-up effect” is determined when the number of reserved memories is small compared to when the number is large. It may be made easier. For example, when “e24” in the main notice effect pattern determination table C> “e24” in the main notice effect pattern determination table D and the total number of reserved memories is one to two, the main notice effect pattern determination is performed. When the table C is always selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table C> the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table D), and the total number of reserved memories is three or more, the main notice effect pattern The determination table D may be always selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table C <the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table D).

  As another example, in the case of the non-reach variation pattern, the main announcement effect pattern “S-P1” that does not execute the main announcement effect may be determined more easily than in the case of the non-reach variation pattern. For example, when “e21” in the main notice effect pattern determination table D> “e21” in the main notice effect pattern determination table C and the non-reach variation pattern, the main notice effect pattern determination table D is always selected. (Or selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table D> selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table C), and if it is not the non-reach variation pattern, the main notice effect pattern determination table C is always selected (or , Selection ratio of main notice effect pattern determination table D <selection ratio of main notice effect pattern determination table C).

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table C is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table C, and in the main notice effect pattern determination table C, four types of main notice effect patterns ("S-P1" to By comparing the determination value assigned to any of “S-P4”) and the numerical data indicating the random value for determining the main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table C, four types of main notice effects are obtained. Determine one of the patterns. For example, if there is numerical data indicating the random number value within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notification effect pattern “S-P1” in the main notification effect pattern determination table C (within the determination range), the main notification effect pattern “ S-P1 "is determined, and when the numerical data indicating the random number is within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notice effect pattern" S-P2 "in the main notice effect pattern determination table C, the main notice effect pattern When “S-P2” is determined and there is numerical data indicating the random number within the range of the judgment value assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” in the main notice effect pattern determination table C, the main notice effect The pattern “S-P3” is determined, and the random number value is within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P4” in the main notice effect pattern determination table C. If there is to numerical data to determine the main announcement attraction pattern "S-P4".

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table D is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table D, and the main notice effect pattern determination table D includes four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P1”). By comparing the determination value assigned to any of “S-P4”) and the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table D, the main notice effect pattern determination table As in the case where C is selected, one of the four main notice effect patterns is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses the main notice effect pattern determination table C or the main notice effect pattern determination table D to execute the “special stage serif effect”, the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” or the main notice effect. When the pattern “S-P4” is determined, for example, according to the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, etc., a plurality of types for special stages stored in the ROM 121 From the line production (information about the line production), a line set consisting of the first line and the second line is selected.

  As an example, in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern or a big hit fluctuation pattern, it is based on words including a character “heat” or a character of a specific color (for example, red), compared to a case where it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern or a big hit fluctuation pattern. You may make it easy to select a line. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control has different determination values (random numbers (not shown) for determining a line for a special stage) for each line group (the first line and the second line). Among the multiple special stage serif decision tables to which the numerical value to be compared) is assigned, the character “ ", Or a special stage pattern determination table in which more determination values are assigned to words with characters of a specific color (for example, red).

  The effect control CPU 120 uses the main notice effect pattern determination table C and the main notice effect pattern determination table D to execute the “special stage step-up effect”, the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” or the main notice. When the production pattern “S-P4” is determined, for example, a plurality of types for special stages stored in the ROM 121 according to the current game state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, etc. One of the step-up effects is selected from the step-up effects (information on the step-up effects).

  As an example, in the case of a super reach fluctuation pattern or jackpot fluctuation pattern, a step-up effect with a larger number of step-ups (for example, a step in which the number of step ups is four steps) than in the case of no super reach fluctuation pattern or jackpot fluctuation pattern. It may be easy to select an up effect or the like. For example, the production control CPU 120 assigns to each of the step-up numbers a plurality of special values assigned different determination values (numerical values to be compared with a random number for determining the step-up number for the special stage (not shown)). From the stage step-up number determination table, if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern or big hit fluctuation pattern, it is more for step up effects with a larger number of step ups than if it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern or big hit fluctuation pattern Alternatively, the special stage step-up number determination table to which the determination value is assigned may be selected.

  FIG. 24C shows the determination ratio of the main notice effect in the special stage (the determination ratio of the main notice effect based on the main notice effect pattern determination tables E and F (not shown)). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 selects a main notice effect pattern as shown in FIG. 24C in the process (described later) of step S814 in FIG.

  In FIG. 24C, “e31” is a ratio at which the above-described main notice effect pattern “S-P1” is determined (determined). “E32” is a rate at which the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” is determined. “E31” + “e32” = 1. That is, in FIG. 24B, the “special stage serif effect” can be executed, but in FIG. 24C, the “special stage serif effect” cannot be executed.

  The ROM 121 stores a main notice effect pattern for determining (determining) one of the two kinds of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” and “S-P3”) shown in FIG. Two types of main notice effect pattern determination tables (main notice effect pattern determination table E and main notice effect pattern determination table F) are stored as the notice effect pattern determination tables.

The determination ratio “e31” of the main notice effect pattern “SP1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table E is two main notice effect patterns (“S-P1”, “S-P3”) in the main notice effect pattern determination table E. )) To the number of determination values (numbers to be compared with a random value (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table E). Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to "." For example, the main in informational display pattern determination table E, the main announcement attraction pattern number of judgment values assigned to the "S-P1" is _one E, main announcement attraction pattern number of judgment values assigned to the "S-P3" is E _When there are two, the determination ratio “e31” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” according to the main notice effect pattern determination table E is E ₁ / (E ₁ + E ₂ ).

The determination ratio “e32” of the main notice effect pattern “SP3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table E is a determination value assigned to one of the two main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table E. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P3”. For example, as described above, the main in informational display pattern determination table E, the main subject _one the number of judgment values assigned to effect pattern "S-P1" is E, the main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the "S-P3" If the number of is _{two E,} main announcement attraction pattern determination table main announcement attraction pattern by E "S-P3 'determined percentage" e32 _"of, the _{E 2 / (E 1 + E} 2).

The determination ratio “e31” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” in the main notice effect pattern determination table F is a determination value (main value) assigned to one of the two main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table F. This is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” to the number of random numbers (not shown) for determining the main notice effect pattern determined by the notice effect pattern determination table F. . For example, the main subject in the demonstration pattern determination table F, the main announcement attraction pattern number is _one F decision value assigned to the "S-P1", the number of main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the "S-P3" is F _When there are two, the determination ratio “e31” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table F is F ₁ / (F ₁ + F ₂ ).

Further, the determination ratio “e32” of the main notice effect pattern “SP3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table F is a determination value assigned to one of the two main notice effect patterns in the main notice effect pattern determination table F. Is the ratio of the number of determination values assigned to the main notice effect pattern “S-P3”. For example, as described above, the main announcement in demonstration pattern determination table F, the main announcement attraction pattern number of judgment values _one F assigned to the "S-P1", the main announcement attraction pattern decision value assigned to the "S-P3" When the number of is F ₂ , the determination ratio “e32” of the main notice effect pattern “S−P3” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table F is F ₂ / (F ₁ + F ₂ ).

  Further, the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table E is different from the determination ratio of each main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table F. Specifically, a determination ratio “e31” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table E and a determination ratio “e” of the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” based on the main notice effect pattern determination table F “ “e31” is different or the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” is determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table F and the determination ratio “e32” of the main notice effect pattern “SP3” is determined by the main notice effect pattern determination table E The ratio “e32” is different, or at least one is different (two are actually different because there is no case where only one is actually different).

  When determining any main notice effect pattern from two types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” and “S-P3”), the effect control CPU 120 first determines the main notice effect pattern determination table E, One of the main notice effect pattern determination tables F is selected. For example, one of the main notice effect pattern determination table E and the main notice effect pattern determination table F is selected according to the current game state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, and the like.

  As an example, the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” for executing the “special stage step-up effect” may be more easily determined when the number of reserved memories is small than when it is large. For example, when “e32” in the main notice effect pattern determination table E> “e32” in the main notice effect pattern determination table F and the total number of reserved memories is one or two, the main notice effect pattern determination is performed. When the table E is always selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table E> the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table F), and the total number of reserved memories is three or more, the main notice effect pattern The determination table F may be always selected (or the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table E <the selection ratio of the main notice effect pattern determination table F). As another example, in the case of a non-reach variation pattern, the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” may be less likely to be determined than in the case of a non-reach variation pattern.

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table E is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table E, and in the main notice effect pattern determination table E, two types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1”, “ S-P3 ") is compared with numerical data indicating a random value for determining the main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table E, thereby comparing the two types of main notice effect patterns. Is determined. For example, when there is numerical data indicating the random number value within the determination value range (in the determination range) assigned to the main notification effect pattern “S-P1” in the main notification effect pattern determination table E, the main notification effect pattern “ S-P1 "is determined, and when the numerical data indicating the random number is within the range of the determination value assigned to the main notification effect pattern" S-P3 "in the main notification effect pattern determination table E, the main notification effect pattern “S-P3” is determined.

  When the main notice effect pattern determination table F is selected, the effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect pattern determination table F, and in the main notice effect pattern determination table F, two types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1”, “ S-P3 ") is compared with numerical data indicating a random value for determining the main notice effect pattern by the main notice effect pattern determination table F, thereby comparing the main notice effect pattern determination table E. As in the case of selecting, one of the two types of main notice effect patterns is determined.

  The effect control CPU 120 uses the main notice effect pattern determination table E and the main notice effect pattern determination table F to determine the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” in which the “special stage step-up effect” is executed. For example, depending on the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, etc., a plurality of types of step-up effects for the special stage stored in the ROM 121 (information on step-up effects) ) To select one of the step-up effects.

  For example, as in the case of FIG. 24B, for example, in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern or the big hit fluctuation pattern, the step up effect having a larger number of step ups than in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern or the big hit fluctuation pattern. (For example, a step-up effect in which the number of step-ups is four steps) may be easily selected.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control pattern setting process executed in step S710 of FIG. FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special stage transition determination process executed in step S730 in FIG. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a normal stage transition determination process executed in step S760 of FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of special stage effect selection processing executed in step S771 of FIG.

  In the effect control pattern setting process shown in FIG. 25, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special stage flag is on (step S720). The special stage flag is information indicating whether or not the current stage (stay stage) is a special stage (underwater stage). If the special stage flag is on (for example, a value “1”, etc.), it indicates that the current stage is a special stage, and the special stage flag is off (for example, a value “0”, etc.). In this case, the current stage is the normal stage (Noyama stage). The value of the special stage flag may be stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191.

  When it is determined in step S720 that the special stage flag is not on (step S720; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes special stage transition determination processing (step S730). The special stage transition determination process is a process for determining whether or not to shift from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage). That is, when the current stage is the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S720; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to shift to the special stage (underwater stage). Hereinafter, the special stage shift determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the special stage transition determination process shown in FIG. 26, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the normal stage counter is greater than or equal to the first threshold value (step S731). The normal stage counter is the number of stays staying at the normal stage (Noyama stage) without going to the special stage (underwater stage) after moving from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage). (Number of fluctuations), that is, the number of stays (number of fluctuations) staying continuously from the latest transition to the normal stage (Noyama stage) that is the current stage. Data indicating the count value of the normal stage counter may be stored in, for example, the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  The first threshold value to be compared with the count value of the normal stage counter is any one of the second threshold value, the third threshold value, and the fourth threshold value to be compared with the count value of the special stage counter, which will be described later. The same value may be used, or a different value may be used.

  If it is determined in step S731 that the count value of the normal stage counter is not equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S731; No), the special stage transition determination process shown in FIG. 26 is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S731 that the count value of the normal stage counter is equal to or greater than the first threshold value (step S731; Yes), the production control CPU 120 starts from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage). ) To perform a special stage transition lottery for lottery (step S732). For example, the production control CPU 120 compares the determination value (random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to shift to the special stage) for each of “with transition to special stage” and “without transition to special stage”. Refer to the special stage migration presence / absence determination table to which the special stage transition presence / absence determination table is assigned, and the judgment value of “Migration to special stage” or “No migration to special stage” in the special stage migration existence determination table Whether or not to shift from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage) is determined by lottery by comparing with numerical data indicating random numbers for presence / absence determination. For example, if there is numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not to move to the special stage within the judgment range of “With transition to special stage”, the stage shifts from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage) If there is numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not to move to the special stage within the determination range of “no shift to special stage”, the special stage (Noyama stage) is special It is determined (lottery) that the stage (underwater stage) will not be transferred.

  After performing the special stage shift lottery (step S732), the effect control CPU 120 draws the fact that the special stage shift lottery (step S732) shifts from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage) ( It is determined whether or not (step S733). If it is determined in step S733 that the normal stage (Noyama stage) is not selected for the transition to the special stage (underwater stage) (step S733; No), the special stage transition determination process shown in FIG. Exit. That is, if the lottery result of the special stage shift lottery (step S732) is a lottery result indicating that the shift to the special stage is not performed, the special stage shift determination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S733 that the normal stage (Noyama stage) is shifted to the special stage (underwater stage) (step S733; Yes), the transition flag is turned on (for example, the value “1”). Etc.) (step S734). The transition flag is information indicating whether or not to perform stage transition. When the transition flag is on (for example, the value “1”, etc.), it indicates that the stage is to be transitioned from the current stage to another stage in the next change, etc., and the transition flag is off (for example, the value “0”). Or the like) indicates that the current stage is not shifted to another stage (the current stage is maintained). After the transition flag is turned on, the special stage transition determination process shown in FIG. That is, when the lottery result of the special stage shift lottery (step S732) is a lottery result indicating that the shift to the special stage is performed, the shift flag is turned on, and the special stage shift determination process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the transition flag is ON (step S740). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined in the stage transition determination process in step S730 that transition to a special stage (underwater stage) has been performed.

  When it is determined in step S740 that the transition flag is not on (step S740; No), a normal stage effect selection process is executed (step S741).

  Specifically, in the normal stage effect selection process in step S741, any one of the four types of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” to “N-P4”) shown in FIG. Select the main notice effect pattern. That is, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the main notice effect pattern determination table A or the main notice effect pattern determination table depends on the current game state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, and the like. B is selected, and four types of main notice effect patterns (“N-P1” to “N-P4”) are selected using the selected main notice effect pattern determination table A (or main notice effect pattern determination table B). )), One of the main notice effect patterns is determined. In the normal stage effect selection process in step S741, when the main notice effect pattern (“N-P2” “N-P4”) in which the “normal stage serif effect” is executed is determined, it is stored in the ROM 121. As described above, a set of lines composed of a first line and a second line is selected from a plurality of types of line effects (information related to the line effects) for the normal stage. When the main notice effect pattern (“N-P3” and “N-P4”) in which the “normal stage step-up effect” is executed is determined, a plurality of types of steps for the normal stage stored in the ROM 121 are determined. As described above, one of the step-up effects is selected from the up effects (information about the step-up effects).

  After performing the normal stage effect selection process (step S741), the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) an effect control pattern (step S742). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 provides effect control corresponding to the effect control pattern corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command or the main notice effect effect pattern selected in the effect selection process for normal stage in step S741. Set the pattern as the usage pattern. When a plurality of effect control patterns corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command are prepared, any one is selected and set as a use pattern (the same applies to the main notice effect pattern and the like). ). The same applies to step S752, step S782, step 812, step S815 in FIG. 28, step S822, step S842, step S845 in FIG. 33, and step S872, step S875 in FIG. After the effect control pattern is set in step S742, the count value of the normal stage counter is updated (+1) (step S743), and the effect control pattern setting process shown in FIG.

  It should be noted that the effect control pattern set in step S742 corresponding to the serif effect that is the effect for the normal stage includes the button effective period of the serif effect that is the reception time of the operation action for the serif effect (the start timing of the serif operation reception, (Serial operation acceptance end timing), information for controlling the display time (button display start timing, button display end timing) of a button (for example, the button (d) in FIG. 39) for the serif effect, and the like. The same applies to the effect control pattern that is set in step S812 of FIG. 28 or the like and that corresponds to the speech effect that is the effect for the special stage.

  When it is determined in step S740 that the transition flag is on (step S740; Yes), a special stage transition effect is determined (step S751). The special stage transition effect is an effect (effect expressing switching) when shifting from a normal stage (Noyama stage) to a special stage (underwater stage). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S752). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the effect control pattern corresponding to the special stage transition effect determined in the process of step S751 as the use pattern. set.

  After setting the effect control pattern in step S752, the transition flag is turned off (for example, value “0”, etc.) (step S753), and the special stage flag is turned on (for example, value “1”, etc.) (step S754), “1” is set to the count value of the special stage counter (step S756), the count value of the normal stage counter is cleared (for example, value “0”, etc.) (step S757), and the effect control shown in FIG. The pattern setting process ends. The special stage counter is the number of stays staying at the special stage (underwater stage) without going to the normal stage (Noyama stage) after moving from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage). (Number of fluctuations), that is, the number of stays (number of fluctuations) staying continuously from the latest transition to the special stage (underwater stage) that is the current stage. The data indicating the count value of the special stage counter may be stored in, for example, the effect control counter setting unit 193.

  When it is determined in step S720 that the special stage flag is on (step S720; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a normal stage transition determination process (step S760). The normal stage transition determination process is a process for determining whether or not to shift from a special stage (underwater stage) to a normal stage (Noyama stage). That is, when the current stage is a special stage (underwater stage) (step S720; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to shift to the normal stage (Noyama stage). Hereinafter, the normal stage shift determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the normal stage transition determination process shown in FIG. 27, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching instruction flag is on (step S761). The switching instruction flag is information indicating whether or not the player has given an instruction to switch the stage (an instruction to move the stage from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage)). When the switching instruction flag is on (for example, a value “1”, etc.), it indicates that the above instruction has been given. When the special stage flag is off (for example, a value “0”, for example), Indicates that there was no instruction above. The value of the switching instruction flag may be stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191. If it is determined in step S761 that the switching instruction flag is on (step S761; Yes), the switching instruction flag is turned off (for example, a value “0”, etc.) (step S762), and the transition flag is set. It is turned on (for example, value “1”, etc.) (step S766), and the normal stage transition determination process shown in FIG. 27 is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S761 that the switching instruction flag is not on (step S761; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value. Determination is made (step S763). The threshold value to be compared with the count value of the special stage counter includes the third threshold value and the second threshold value in addition to the fourth threshold value described above, and the fourth threshold value (for example, 60)> the first threshold value. Threshold of 3 (for example, 30)> second threshold (for example, 10). When it is determined in step S763 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S763; No), the normal stage transition determination process shown in FIG. 27 is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S763 that the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (step S763; Yes), the production control CPU 120 changes from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage). The normal stage transition lottery for lottery of whether to shift to () is performed (step S764). For example, the production control CPU 120 compares a determination value (random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to shift to the normal stage) for each of “with shift to the normal stage” and “without shift to the normal stage”. The normal stage transition presence / absence determination table to which the standard stage transition assignment determination table is assigned, the judgment values of “with transition to normal stage” and “without transition to normal stage” in the normal stage transition presence / absence determination table, and transition to normal stage Whether or not to shift from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage) is selected by comparing with numerical data indicating random numbers for presence / absence determination. For example, if there is numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to move to the normal stage within the judgment range of “with shift to normal stage”, shift from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage) If there is numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not to move to the normal stage within the determination range of “No shift to normal stage”, it is normal from the special stage (underwater stage) It is determined (lottery) that the stage (Noyama stage) will not be transferred.

  After performing the normal stage shift lottery (step S764), the effect control CPU 120 draws the fact that the special stage (underwater stage) shifts to the normal stage (noyama stage) in the normal stage shift lottery (step S764). It is determined whether or not (step S765). When it is determined in step S765 that the special stage (underwater stage) is not selected for the transition to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S765; No), the normal stage transition determination process shown in FIG. Exit. That is, when the lottery result of the normal stage shift lottery (step S764) is a lottery result indicating that the shift to the normal stage is not performed, the normal stage shift determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S765 that the special stage (underwater stage) is shifted to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S765; Yes), the transition flag is turned on (for example, the value “1”). Etc.) (step S766), and the normal stage transition determination process shown in FIG. That is, when the lottery result of the normal stage shift lottery (step S764) is a lottery result indicating that the shift to the normal stage is performed, the shift flag is turned on, and the normal stage shift determination process ends.

  Returning to FIG. 25, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not the transition flag is ON (step S770). That is, it is determined whether or not it is determined in the stage transition determination process in step S760 that the transition to the normal stage (Noyama stage) is performed.

  When it is determined in step S770 that the transition flag is not on (step S770; No), special stage effect selection processing is executed (step S771). The special stage effect selection process will be described below with reference to FIG.

  In the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than a fourth threshold value (step S800).

  When it is determined in step S800 that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S800; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 starts from the selected effect (special stage (underwater stage) to normal stage). A selection effect execution lottery C is performed in which whether or not to shift to (Noyama stage) is determined (step S801). For example, the production control CPU 120 assigns a determination value (a numerical value to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform a selection effect) to each of “selection effect execution present” and “selection effect execution no”. Referring to the selected effect execution presence / absence determination table C, numerical data indicating a determination value of “selection effect execution present” and “selection effect execution not performed” in the selection effect execution presence / absence determination table C and a random value for determining the selection effect execution presence / absence And whether or not to execute the selection effect. For example, if there is numerical data indicating a random value for determining whether or not to perform selection effect within the determination range of “selection effect execution present”, it is determined (lottery) to execute the selection effect, and “no selection effect execution” If there is numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to perform the selection effect within the determination range, it is determined (lottery) that the selection effect is not executed.

  When it is determined in step S800 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S800; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the third threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S802). As described above, the third threshold (for example, 30) <the fourth threshold (for example, 60).

  When it is determined in step S802 that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the third threshold (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery B is performed (step S803). For example, the production control CPU 120 assigns a determination value (a numerical value to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform a selection effect) to each of “selection effect execution present” and “selection effect execution no”. Referring to the selection effect execution presence / absence determination table B, numerical data indicating the determination values of “selection effect execution presence / absence” and “selection effect execution / non-execution” in the selection effect execution presence / absence determination table B and a random value for determining whether or not the selection effect execution is performed And whether or not to execute the selection effect.

  When it is determined in step S802 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the third threshold value (step S802; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the second threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S804). As described above, the second threshold value (for example, 10) <the third threshold value (for example, 30).

  When it is determined in step S804 that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery A is performed (step S805). For example, the production control CPU 120 assigns a determination value (a numerical value to be compared with a random number (not shown) for determining whether or not to perform a selection effect) to each of “selection effect execution present” and “selection effect execution no”. Referring to the selection effect execution presence / absence determination table A, numerical data indicating the determination values of “selection effect execution / non-execution” and the random value for determining the selection effect execution / non-execution in the selection effect execution / non-execution determination table A And whether or not to execute the selection effect.

As described above, the selection effect execution lottery A in step S805, the selection effect execution lottery B in step S803, and the selection effect execution lottery C in step S801 are the same lottery, but according to the selection effect execution lottery A in step S805. Determination ratio with selection effect execution (for example, 1/5, etc.)> Determination ratio with selection effect execution with selection effect execution lottery B in step S803 (for example, 1/15)> by selection effect execution lottery C in step S801 It is a determination ratio (for example, 1/100, etc.) with selection effect execution. That is, in selected demonstration execution state determination table A, X ₁ or the number of judgment values assigned to "selective demonstration execution Yes", _two X the number of judgment values assigned to "selective demonstration execution existence", execution selection effect In the presence / absence determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to “selection execution execution present” is X _{3 and} the number of determination values assigned to “selection execution execution presence / absence” is X ₄ ; , X ₅ or the number of judgment values assigned to "selective demonstration execution yes", the number of judgment values assigned to "selective demonstration execution existence" when a ₆ X, execution selection effects by selecting demonstration execution lottery a Determination ratio of presence {X ₁ / (X ₁ + X ₂ )}> Determination ratio of selection effect execution by selection effect execution lottery B {X ₃ / (X ₃ + X ₄ )}> Selection effect execution by selection effect execution lottery B Yes judgment ratio { ₅ / is a _{(X 5 + X 6)}} .

  After performing the selection effect execution lottery C in step S801, after performing the selection effect execution lottery B in step S803, after performing the selection effect execution lottery A in step S805, or in step S804 When it is determined that the count value of the stage counter is not equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S804; No), the effect control CPU 120 selects the selected effect in the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, B, C). It is determined whether or not it has been lottery (determination) to execute (step S810).

  When it is determined in step S810 that the selection effect is not to be executed (step S810; No), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is not executed in the variation, the effect control CPU 120 Then, a special stage effect other than the selected effect is selected from the line effect presence table (step S811).

  Specifically, in the process of step S811, any main notice effect pattern is selected from the four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) shown in FIG. Determine (determine). In other words, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the main notice effect pattern determination table C or the main notice effect pattern determination table depends on the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, and the like. D is selected and four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) are selected using the selected main notice effect pattern determination table C (or main notice effect pattern determination table D). )), One of the main notice effect patterns is determined. In the process of step S811, when the main notice effect pattern (“S-P2” and “S-P4”) in which the “special stage serif effect” is executed is determined, the special stage use message stored in the ROM 121 is determined. From the plurality of types of dialogue production (information on dialogue production), as described above, a set of dialogue consisting of the first dialogue and the second dialogue is selected. Further, when the main notice effect pattern (“S-P3” and “S-P4”) in which the “step-up effect for special stage” is executed is determined, a plurality of types of steps for the special stage stored in the ROM 121 are determined. As described above, one of the step-up effects is selected from the up effects (information about the step-up effects).

  After performing the process of step S811, the CPU 120 for effect control sets (sets) an effect control pattern (step S812). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control creates an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or an effect control pattern (“special stage” corresponding to the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S811. "S-P1" to "S-P4" including "S-P2" and "S-P4" in which the "line effect" is executed) is set as a usage pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S812, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 28 is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S810 that the selection effect is to be executed (step S810; Yes), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is to be executed in the change, the effect control CPU 120 selects the selection effect. Is determined (step S813). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control determines a selected effect pattern corresponding to the selected effect. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), since there is only one type of selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 simply determines a predetermined selection effect pattern. A plurality of types of selection effects (selection effect patterns) may be prepared, and one of the selection effects (selection effect patterns) may be selected and determined. After determining the selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special stage effect other than the selection effect from the no-line effect table (step S814).

  Specifically, in the process of step S814, one of the main notice effect patterns is determined from the two types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” and “S-P3”) shown in FIG. (judge. That is, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the main notice effect pattern determination table E or the main notice effect pattern determination table is in accordance with the current gaming state (normal state / probability change state), the number of reserved memories, the variation pattern, and the like. One of F is selected, and two types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” and “S-P3”) are selected using the selected main notice effect pattern determination table E (or main notice effect pattern determination table F). ) To determine any main notice effect pattern. Further, in the process of step S814, when the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” in which the “special stage step-up effect” is executed is determined, plural types of step-ups for the special stage stored in the ROM 121 are determined. As described above, one of the step-up effects is selected from the effects (information about the step-up effects).

  After performing the process of step S814, the CPU 120 for effect control sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S815). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 provides an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern determined in the process of step S813, An effect control pattern corresponding to the main notice effect pattern selected in the process (either “S-P1” or “S-P3” in which “the special stage serif effect” is not executed) is set as the use pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S815, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 28 ends.

  The production control pattern corresponding to the selected production pattern set in step S815 includes a switching operation reception time (for example, an acceptable reception start timing, an acceptable reception end timing, etc.) that is an acceptable time for a switching operation, and a telop. Information for controlling the display time (telop display start timing, telop display end timing), and the like. The same applies to the effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern set in step S845 in FIG. 33 (and step S875 in FIG. 34).

  Returning to FIG. 25, after performing the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 updates (+1) the count value of the special stage counter (step S772), and the result is shown in FIG. The effect control pattern setting process ends.

  In FIG. 25, when it is determined in step S770 that the transition flag is on (step S770; Yes), a normal stage transition effect is determined (step S781). The normal stage transition effect is an effect (effect expressing switching) when shifting from a special stage (underwater stage) to a normal stage (Noyama stage). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S782). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 uses the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the effect control pattern corresponding to the normal stage transition effect determined in the process of step S781 as the use pattern. set.

  After the production control pattern is set in step S782, the transition flag is turned off (eg, value “0”, etc.) (step S783), and the special stage flag is turned off (eg, value “0”, etc.) (step S784), the count value of the special stage counter is cleared (for example, value “0”, etc.) (step S786), the count value of the normal stage counter is set to “1” (step S787), and the effect control shown in FIG. The pattern setting process ends.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 sets a variation time timer corresponding to the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command (step S900). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S901). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect output processing (S902). Details of the effect output process will be described later. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a time-out has occurred based on the value of the variation time timer (S903). When it is determined in step S903 that a time-out has occurred (step S903; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S905). The variable display effect processing (step S172) is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S903 that the timeout has not occurred (step S903; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command has been received (step S904). When it is determined in step S904 that the symbol confirmation command has not been received (step S904; No), the variable display effect process (step S172) is terminated. That is, the value of the effect process flag is maintained as “2”. When it is determined in step S904 that the symbol confirmation command has been received (step S904; Yes), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” (step S905), and the variable display effect processing (step S172) is terminated. When the symbol determination command is received in a state where the timeout has not occurred (step S903; No), the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special symbol. In addition to the above, the value of the effect process flag may be updated to “3” when, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect output process executed in step S902 of FIG. In addition, in the flowchart of FIG. 30, the output of the step-up effect that is not related to the operation action is omitted. Also, the display and deletion of buttons are omitted. Also. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the display device 5 displays a telop that informs the player that a switching operation (operation act on the push button 31B) is accepted as a selection effect. It shall be displayed in the area. In addition, the switching operation reception time (acceptable start timing to receivable end timing), which is the receivable time of the switching operation, is the same as the telop display time (telop display start timing to telop display end timing) ( However, it shall be invalidated after accepting the switching operation). In addition, as with the switching operation, the push button 31B is used as a response to the line effect.

  In the effect output process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the telop display start timing (timing to start displaying the telop) (step S910). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the telop display start timing based on the effect control process timer determination value included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect (selected effect pattern) determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710. It is determined whether or not. That is, when the selection effect is not determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710 (for example, when the current stage is the normal stage (Noyama stage) or in the special stage (underwater stage), the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect) If the lottery to execute the selection effect is not performed in the execution lottery A, B, C)), the telop display start timing (the telop display end timing is also the same) is not reached (always step S910 (No ), Step S912 (No)).

  When it is determined in step S910 that it is the telop display start timing (step S910; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the telop based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect (starts the telop display). (Step S911).

  After performing the process of step S911 or when it is determined in step S910 that the telop display start timing is not reached (step S910; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the telop display end timing (ends the display of the telop). It is determined whether or not (timing) (step S912). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the telop display end timing, similarly to the determination of the telop display start timing. When it is determined in step S912 that it is the telop display end timing (step S912; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the telop (ends the telop display) (step S913).

  After performing the process of step S913 or when it is determined in step S912 that the telop display end timing is not reached (step S912; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been an operation act on the push button 31B. Is determined (step S914). When it is determined in step S914 that there is an operation action (step S914; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is within the switching operation reception time (step S915). When it is determined in step S915 that it is within the switching operation reception time (step S915; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 deletes the telop (terp display is terminated) (step S916), and the subsequent switching. The operation is invalidated (step S917), and the switching instruction flag is turned on (for example, the value “1”) (step S918).

  After performing the process of step S918, after determining that there is no operation (step S914; No), or determining that it is not within the switching operation reception time (step S915; No) in step S915. When it has been made, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the speech effect start timing (timing to start executing the speech effect) (step S920). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the serif effect start timing based on the effect control process timer determination value included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the serif effect determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710. Determine. That is, if the line effect is not determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710, the line effect start timing (the line effect end timing is also the same) is not reached (always step S920 (No), step S931 (No). )).

  When it is determined in step S920 that it is the timing for starting the line production (step S920; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the first line based on the production control pattern corresponding to the line production (first person). Are displayed) (step S921).

  After performing the process of step S921, or when it is determined in step S920 that the line production start timing is not reached (step S920; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not there has been an operation act on the push button 31B. Is determined (step S924). When it is determined in step S924 that there is an operation action (step S924; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is within the speech operation reception time (step S925). When it is determined in step S925 that it is within the speech operation reception time (step S925; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the second dialogue based on the production control pattern corresponding to the speech production ( The display of the second line is started (step S926), and the subsequent line operation (operation action for the line effect) is invalidated (step S927).

  After performing the process of step S927, after determining that there is no operation action at step S924 (step S924; No), or determining at step S925 that it is not within the speech operation reception time (step S925). ; No), it is determined whether or not it is the speech production end timing (timing for ending the execution of the speech production) (step S931). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the serif effect end timing, as in the determination of the serif effect start timing. When it is determined in step S931 that the timing is not the end of the line production (step S931; No), the production output process shown in FIG. 30 is terminated. When it is determined in step S931 that it is the timing of the end of the line production (step S931; Yes), the production control CPU 120 is the first person (if the second person is displayed, the first and second person). Are erased (step S932), and the effect output process shown in FIG. 30 is terminated.

  As described above, the display and deletion of buttons are omitted in the flowchart of FIG. 30, but the display and deletion of buttons may be performed in the same manner as the display and deletion of telops (the same applies to the flowchart of FIG. 35). is there). That is, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the button display start timing (timing for starting the button display) (not shown in FIG. 30, the same applies hereinafter). For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the button display start timing based on the effect control process timer determination value included in the effect control pattern corresponding to the line effect determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710. Determine. That is, when the line effect is not determined in the effect control pattern setting process in step S710, the button display start timing (the button display end timing is the same) is not reached.

  When it is determined that it is the button display start timing, the effect control CPU 120 displays the button (starts button display) based on the effect control pattern corresponding to the line effect. When the button display is started or when it is determined that it is not the button display start timing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the button display end timing (timing to end the button display). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the button display end timing, similarly to the determination of the button display end timing. When it is determined that it is the button display end timing, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the button (ends the button display). Note that even when the button is pressed within the speech operation reception time (step S925; Yes), the button is deleted (button display ends).

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching operation. Specifically, FIG. 31 is a time chart showing the timing and the like related to the switching operation by the effect output process shown in FIG. FIG. 31A shows a telop display (telop display start timing) when a telop display (display of a telop notifying the player that the operation action is accepted) is performed and there is no operation action (button depression). -Telop display end timing) and the button valid period (switching operation reception time) of the telop display. As described above, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the player is notified that the operation action for the switching operation is accepted by the telop display.

  FIG. 31B shows a telop display (notification of operation acceptance for the switching operation) and a telop display button valid period (switching operation acceptance time) when the telop display of the switching operation is performed and there is an operation action. ). In FIG. 31 (the same applies to FIG. 32 and the like), the horizontal axis in the figure indicates the elapsed time (seconds) from the start of fluctuation.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (A), the button is enabled while the telop is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 31 (A), after about 1 second from the start of change to about 5 seconds after the start of change). Yes. As shown in FIG. 31B, when the button is pressed (in the example of FIG. 31B, the button is pressed after about 3.5 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the telop display is erased, Button reception is disabled.

  FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a line effect. Specifically, FIG. 32 is a time chart showing the timing and the like related to the serif effect by the effect output process shown in FIG. FIG. 32A shows a first line display (display start timing to display end timing of the first line) and buttons when there is no operation line (operation line to the push button 31B) in the line production. A display (button display for notifying the player that an operation act on the push button 31B is accepted) and a button effective period of the serif effect (accepting time for the operation act on the serif effect) are shown. In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the player is notified that the operation action for the speech effect is accepted by the button display. Note that FIG. 32A also shows a display example of button display.

  FIG. 32 (B) shows the display of the first dialog, the display of the second dialog (display start timing to the display end timing of the second dialog), and button display when there is an operation action in the dialog production. The notification of the operation reception with respect to the line production) and the button valid period of the line production are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, when the button is being displayed (in the example of FIG. 32A, after about 2 seconds from the start of change to about 4 seconds after the start of change), the button is enabled. Yes. Since the button is not pressed, the second dialog is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 32B, when the button is pressed (in the example of FIG. 32B, the button is pressed after about 3 seconds from the start of the change), the button display is erased and the button is deleted. Will be invalidated. Since the button has been pressed, in addition to the first user's line, the second line after the button is displayed is also displayed.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described. The difference between the second embodiment and the first embodiment is a special stage effect selection process. In the second embodiment, the special stage effect selection process of FIG. 33 is executed instead of the special stage effect selection process of FIG. 28 in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special stage effect selection processing according to the second embodiment. In the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special stage effect other than the selected effect from the line effect presence table (step S820). In the process of step S820 in FIG. 33, as in the process of step S811 in FIG. 28, the four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) shown in FIG. One of the main notice effect patterns is determined (determined).

  After performing the process of step S820, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not the line effect is selected (step S821). In other words, the CPU 120 for effect control uses the “special stage use” from the four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the main notice effect pattern (“S-P2” and “S-P4”) in which the “line effect” is executed is determined.

  When it is determined in step S821 that the line effect has been selected (step S821; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S822). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S820 ("special stage serif effect"). The effect control pattern corresponding to “S-P2” or “S-P4”) is set as the usage pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S822, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 33 ends.

  When it is determined in step S821 that the line effect is not selected (step S821; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value. (Step S830). When it is determined in step S830 that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S830; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery C is performed (step S831). In the selection effect execution lottery C in step S831 in FIG. 33, the selection effect execution lottery C in step S801 in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S830 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S830; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the third threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S832). When it is determined in step S832 that the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the third threshold (step S832; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery B is performed (step S833). In the selection effect execution lottery B in step S833 of FIG. 33, the selection effect execution lottery B in step S803 of FIG.

  When it is determined in step S832 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the third threshold value (step S832; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the second threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S834). When it is determined in step S834 that the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the second threshold value (step S834; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery A is performed (step S835). In the selection effect execution lottery A in step S835 in FIG. 33, whether or not to execute the selection effect is selected in the same manner as the selection effect execution lottery A in step S805 in FIG.

  After performing the selection effect execution lottery C in step S831, after performing the selection effect execution lottery B in step S833, after performing the selection effect execution lottery A in step S835, or in step S834 When it is determined that the count value of the stage counter is not greater than or equal to the second threshold (step S834; No), the effect control CPU 120 selects the selected effect in the selected effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, B, C). It is determined whether or not it has been lottery (determination) to execute (step S840).

  When it is determined in step S840 that the selection effect is not executed (step S840; No), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is not executed in the variation, the effect control CPU 120 An effect control pattern is set (set) (step S842). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S820 ("special stage serif effect"). An effect control pattern corresponding to “S-P1” or “S-P3” not set) is set as a use pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S842, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 33 ends.

  When it is determined in step S840 that the selection effect is to be executed (step S840; Yes), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is to be executed in the change, the effect control CPU 120 selects the selection effect. Is determined (step S843). In the process of step S843 of FIG. 33, the selection effect is determined in the same manner as the process of step S813 of FIG. After determining the selection effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S845). Specifically, the CPU 120 for effect control produces an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or an effect control pattern (“special stage” corresponding to the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S820. “S-P1” or “S-P3” in which the “line effect” is not executed) or an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern determined in the process of step S843 is set as a use pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S845, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 33 ends.

  That is, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, first, it is determined whether or not the selection effect is to be executed (step S801, step S803, and step S805). S810; Yes), any special stage effect other than the serif effect is selected (step S814, step S815). In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the stage effect is selected (step S820) and the line effect is selected (step S821; Yes), the selected effect is not executed (step S822).

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The difference between the third embodiment and the first embodiment is special stage effect selection processing and effect output processing. In the third embodiment, the special stage effect selection process in FIG. 34 is executed instead of the special stage effect selection process in FIG. 28 in the first embodiment, and the effect output process in FIG. 30 in the first embodiment. Instead, the effect output process of FIG. 35 is executed.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of special stage effect selection processing according to the third embodiment. In the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 selects a special stage effect other than the selected effect from the speech effect presence table (step S850). In the process of step S850 in FIG. 34, as in the process of step S811 in FIG. 28, the four types of main notice effect patterns (“S-P1” to “S-P4”) shown in FIG. One of the main notice effect patterns is determined (determined).

  After performing the process of step S850, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold value (step S860). When it is determined in step S860 that the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the fourth threshold (step S860; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery C is performed (step S861). In the selection effect execution lottery C in step S861 in FIG. 34, the selection effect execution lottery C in step S801 in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S860 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value (step S860; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the third threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S862). When it is determined in step S862 that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the third threshold (step S862; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery B is performed (step S863). In the selection effect execution lottery B in step S863 in FIG. 34, whether or not to execute the selection effect is selected in the same manner as the selection effect execution lottery B in step S803 in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S862 that the count value of the special stage counter is not equal to or greater than the third threshold value (step S862; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the count value of the special stage counter is equal to or greater than the second threshold value. It is determined whether or not there is (step S864). When it is determined in step S864 that the count value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the second threshold (step S864; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute the selected effect. An effect execution lottery A is performed (step S865). In the selection effect execution lottery A in step S865 in FIG. 34, the selection effect execution lottery A in step S805 in FIG.

  After performing the selection effect execution lottery C in step S861, after performing the selection effect execution lottery B in step S863, or after performing the selection effect execution lottery A in step S865, or special in step S864. When it is determined that the count value of the stage counter is not equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S864; No), the effect control CPU 120 selects the selected effect in the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, B, C). It is determined whether or not it has been lottery (determination) to execute (step S870).

  When it is determined in step S870 that the selection effect is not executed (step S870; No), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is not executed in the variation, the effect control CPU 120 An effect control pattern is set (set) (step S872). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or an effect control pattern (“special stage” corresponding to the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S850. "S-P1" to "S-P4" including "S-P2" and "S-P4" in which the "line effect" is executed) is set as a usage pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S872, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 34 ends.

  When it is determined in step S870 that the selection effect is to be executed (step S870; Yes), that is, when it is determined that the selection effect is to be executed in the variation, the effect control CPU 120 selects the selection effect. Is determined (step S873). In the process of step S873 of FIG. 34, the selection effect is determined in the same manner as the process of step S813 of FIG. After determining the selected effect, the effect control CPU 120 sets (sets) the effect control pattern (step S875). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or an effect control pattern (“special stage” corresponding to the main notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S850. "S-P2" or "S-P4", including "S-P2" or "S-P4") for which "Serial production for line" is executed), or the selected production pattern determined in step S873 The production control pattern to be used is set as the usage pattern. After the effect control pattern is set in step S875, the special stage effect selection process shown in FIG. 34 ends.

  That is, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the selection effect and the serif effect are not executed in the same variation, but in the third embodiment, the selection effect and the serif effect are the same. May be performed in a variation.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect output process in the third embodiment. Note that the effect output process in the first embodiment and the second embodiment and the effect output process in the third embodiment are the same in steps S910 to S921 in the flowchart shown in FIG. In the flowchart shown in FIG. 35, step S920 and subsequent steps after step S921 are shown (explained), and the same portion (S910 to step S918 in the flowchart shown in FIG. 30) is omitted. That is, what combined step S910-step S918 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 30 and step S920-step S932 of the flowchart shown in FIG. 35 is the effect output process in 3rd Embodiment.

  In the effect output process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the serif effect start timing (timing to start executing the serif effect) (step S920). When it is determined in step S920 that it is the timing for starting the line production (step S920; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the first line based on the production control pattern corresponding to the line production (first person). Are displayed) (step S921).

  After performing the process of step S921, or when it is determined in step S920 that the line production start timing is not reached (step S920; No), the production control CPU 120 performs the line operation reception start timing (operation to the line production). It is determined whether or not it is the timing to start reception of (step S922). For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the timing for accepting the speech operation based on the production control process timer determination value included in the production control pattern corresponding to the speech production determined in the production control pattern setting process in step S710. Determine whether. That is, when the line effect is not determined in the effect control pattern setting process of step S710, the line operation reception start timing (same as the line operation reception end timing) is not reached (always step S922 (No), step S929). (No)).

  When it is determined in step S922 that it is the timing for starting the speech operation reception (step S922; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes an interruption process (FIG. 36A) (step S923).

  FIG. 36A is a flowchart illustrating an example of the interruption process executed in step S923. In the interruption process shown in FIG. 36A, the effect control CPU 120 deletes the telop (ends the telop display) (step S940), invalidates the subsequent switching operation (step S941), and changes to FIG. The indicated interruption process is terminated. In the interruption process, in addition to the above, an interruption flag indicating that the telop display is interrupted may be turned on (for example, a value “1” or the like). The value of the interruption flag may be stored in, for example, the effect control flag setting unit 191.

  After performing the interruption process in step S923 or when it is determined in step S922 that it is not the timing for starting the speech operation reception (step S922; No), the effect control CPU 120 has performed an operation act on the push button 31B. It is determined whether or not (step S924). When it is determined in step S924 that there is an operation action (step S924; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is within the speech operation reception time (step S925). When it is determined in step S925 that it is within the speech operation reception time (step S925; Yes), the production control CPU 120 displays the second dialogue based on the production control pattern corresponding to the speech production ( The display of the second line is started (step S926), the subsequent line operation (the operation action for the line effect) is invalidated (step S927), and the restart process (FIG. 36B) is executed (step S928). .

  FIG. 36B is a flowchart illustrating an example of the restart process executed in step S928 (and step S930). In the restart process shown in FIG. 36B, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the telop display is being interrupted (step S950). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not the telop display is being suspended from the value of the interruption flag. When it is determined in step S950 that the telop display is not interrupted (step S950; No), the restart process shown in FIG.

  When it is determined in step S950 that the telop display is interrupted (step S950; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the switching instruction flag is on (step S951). If it is determined in step S951 that the switching instruction flag is ON (step S951; Yes), the restart process shown in FIG. That is, since the fact that the switching instruction flag is on means that the switching instruction has already been made (step S918 in FIG. 30), it is not necessary to redisplay the telop. Accordingly, the resumption process shown in FIG. 36B is terminated without performing the redisplay of the telop (resuming the telop display).

  If it is determined in step S951 that the switching instruction flag is not on (step S951; No), the telop is displayed again (telop display is resumed) (step S952), and the acceptance of the switching operation is started (step S952). Step S953). That is, the telop display erased in step S940 is displayed again, and the switching operation invalidated in step S941 is validated. Then, the restart process shown in FIG. When the acceptance of the switching operation is started, the interruption flag may be turned off (for example, a value “0”).

  After performing the resumption process in step S928, after determining that there has been no operation in step S924 (step S924; No), or determining in step S925 that it is not within the serif operation reception time (step When S925; No) is made, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the speech operation acceptance end timing (timing to finish accepting the operation to the speech production) (step S929). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the speech operation reception end timing, similarly to the determination of the speech operation reception start timing. When it is determined in step S929 that it is the timing for ending the speech operation reception (step S929; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes a restart process (FIG. 36B) (step S930). The restart process in step S930 is the same as the restart process in step S928.

  After performing the resumption process in step S930 or when it is determined in step S929 that it is not the timing for ending the speech operation reception (step S929; No), at the speech production end timing (timing for ending the execution of the speech production). It is determined whether or not there is (step S931). The effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is the serif effect end timing, as in the determination of the serif effect start timing. When it is determined in step S931 that the timing is not the end of the line production (step S931; No), the production output process shown in FIG. 35 is terminated. When it is determined in step S931 that it is the timing of the end of the line production (step S931; Yes), the production control CPU 120 is the first person (if the second person is displayed, the first and second person). Are erased (step S932), and the effect output process shown in FIG. 35 is terminated.

  37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the switching operation and the speech effect. Specifically, in each of FIGS. 37A, 37B, 38A, and 38B, telop display (notification of operation reception for switching operation) and telop display button enable It is a time chart which shows a period (switching operation reception time), the 1st person's line display, the 2nd line's line display, button display (notification of operation reception to line production), and the button effective period of line production. . Note that in the third embodiment, a dialogue effect and a selection effect can be executed in the same variation, but each of FIGS. 37 (A), 37 (B), 38 (A), and 38 (B). In FIG. 31B, the button valid period (switching operation reception time) of the telop display when the selection effect is executed without executing the line effect is the same as that in FIG. The button effective period of the line effect when the line effect is executed without executing the selection effect is the same as in FIG. 32A (after about 2 seconds from the start of the change to 4 seconds) After the elapse).

  FIG. 37A is a time chart according to the flowchart (effect output process) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37 (A), when the button display for the dialogue effect is started during the display of the telop (in the example of FIG. 37 (A), after about 2 seconds from the start of the change), the telop display is It will be erased and the button will not be accepted for the telop. Further, when a button is pressed for a line effect (in the example of FIG. 37A, after about 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation), the telop is displayed again, and the button can be received again for the telop. If no button is pressed for the line effect, the telop is displayed again after the button effective period of the line effect ends (after about 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change), and the button can be received again for the telop. . Further, when a button is pressed for a telop within the button valid period of the telop display, the telop display is deleted and the button reception for the telop becomes invalid.

  FIG. 37B, FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B are time charts based on operations different from those shown in FIG. 37A (that is, operations according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 35). Specifically, in the case of FIG. 37A, the end timing of the re-displayed telop display is the same as the end timing when the speech effect is not executed (in the example of FIG. 5 seconds later), as shown in FIG. 37B, it may be delayed from the end timing when the line effect is not executed (in the example of FIG. 37B, about 6 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation). rear). In other words, the display time of the telop display and the button valid period (switching operation acceptance time) of the telop display are not shortened by the interruption due to the line production, the end time of the re-displayed telop display, etc. From about 2 seconds to 1 second after about 3 seconds).

  In the case of FIG. 37 (A), the re-display start timing of the telop is when the button for the speech effect is pressed (in the example of FIG. 37 (A), after about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change) As shown in FIGS. 38 (A) and 38 (B), the timing may not be when the button is pressed, but when the button is not pressed for the speech effect. FIG. 38A shows an example in which the end timing of the re-displayed telop display is the same as the end timing when the speech effect is not executed. FIG. 38 (B) shows the display timing of the re-displayed telop so that the display time of the telop display and the button valid period (switching operation reception time) of the telop display are not deleted due to the interruption due to the line production, This is an example in the case of delaying by the interruption time.

  In the example of FIGS. 37B and 38B, the display time of the telop display and the button valid period (switching operation reception time) of the telop display are set according to the line effect even if there is an interruption due to the line effect. It can be secured for the same time as when there was no interruption. On the other hand, in the examples of FIGS. 37A and 38A, the end timing of the re-displayed telop display is constant regardless of whether or not there is an interruption due to the speech production. Control is simpler than changing the end timing according to.

  Next, a specific example of control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

  On the side of the main board 11 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the CPU 103 is the first because the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning opening. When the one start condition is satisfied, the first reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number are updated (steps S301 and S302). The CPU 103 updates the second reserved memory number and the total reserved memory number when the second starting condition is established by the game ball passing (entering) the second starting prize port or the third starting prize port ( Steps S301 and S302). When the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 103 selects the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 8A, and when the current gaming state is the probability change state, the CPU 103 selects FIG. B), the special figure display result determination table is selected. Based on the selected special figure display result determination table and the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the special figure display result is displayed as “ It is determined whether or not “big hit” is set (step S403). Further, the CPU 103 determines that the jackpot type is “first hit” based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8C and the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is determined whether the first big hit (15R probability change), the second big hit (10R probability change) or the third big hit (10R normal change) is set (step S409). Subsequently, the CPU 103 determines a variation category according to the gaming state, the special figure display result, the number of reserved memories, and the like (step S412), and then executes a command control process (step S17), etc. At the time of establishment, a start opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a reserved memory count notification command, and the like are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  Further, when the start condition is satisfied, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special symbol display result is “big hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110) as in the case of the start condition being satisfied (step S240). When “big hit” is set, the big hit type is determined in the same manner as when the start condition is satisfied (step S244). Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111), the CPU 103 determines the variation category (step S261) and determines the variation pattern according to the variation category (step S262) as when the start condition is satisfied. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S17) and the like, and when the start condition is satisfied, the variation pattern designation command and the like are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

  On the side of the production control board 12 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the production control CPU 120 starts the winning prize determination process (step In S150), the display state of the pending storage is determined based on the current game state being the normal state, the command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like.

  On the side of the production control board 12, when the start condition is satisfied, the production control CPU 120 performs the production control of the fluctuation in the production control pattern setting processing (step S710) in the variable display start setting processing (step S171). A pattern is determined.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when the current stage is the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S720; No), the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the special stage. In the determination process (step S730), it is determined whether or not to shift from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage).

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when it is determined not to shift to the special stage (underwater stage) (step S740; No), the stage effect selection process (step S741). , Any one of the normal stage effects including the line effect (any main notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 24A) is determined. Then, the effect control CPU 120 generates an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, and an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect for the normal stage selected in the effect selection process for the normal stage (step S741). The usage pattern is set (step S742).

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when it is determined to shift to the special stage (underwater stage) (step S740; Yes), the special stage transition effect is determined (step S751). ). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the effect control pattern corresponding to the special stage transition effect determined in the process of step S751 as the use pattern ( Step S752).

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when the current stage is a special stage (underwater stage) (step S720; Yes), the production control CPU 120 shifts to the normal stage. In the determination process (step S760), it is determined whether or not to shift from the special stage (underwater stage) to the normal stage (Noyama stage).

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when it is determined to shift to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S770; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the normal stage transition effect. Is determined (step S781). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the effect control pattern corresponding to the normal stage transition effect determined in the process of step S781 as the use pattern ( Step S782).

  In the first embodiment, when it is determined not to shift to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S770; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the special stage effect selection process (step S771) shown in FIG. In step S801, it is determined whether or not to execute the selection effect (step S801, step S803, step S805).

  When the selection effect is not executed (step S810; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs any special stage effect including any line effect (any main notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 24B). Determine (step S811). Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command or the effect control pattern corresponding to the special stage effect determined in the process of step S811 as the use pattern ( Step S812).

  On the other hand, when executing the selection effect (step S810; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the selection effect (selection effect pattern) (step S813), and produces any special stage effect other than the serif effect (step S813). Any main notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 24C is determined (step S814). Then, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern determined in the process of step S813, or the process of step S814. An effect control pattern corresponding to the main notice effect pattern thus set is set as a use pattern (step S815).

  As described above, in the first embodiment, the line effect is not executed in the variation in which the selection effect is executed.

  In the second embodiment, when it is determined not to shift to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S770; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs the special stage effect selection process (step S771) shown in FIG. In step S820, any special stage effect including any line effect (any main notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 24B) is determined. Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the speech effect has been determined (step S821).

  When the line production is determined (step S821; Yes), the production control CPU 120 produces the production control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or the special stage production decided in the process of step S820. An effect control pattern corresponding to is set as a use pattern (step S822).

  When the line effect is not determined (step S821; No), it is determined whether or not to execute the selection effect (step S831, step S833, step S835). When the selected effect is not executed (step S840; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or the special stage effect selected in the process of step S820. An effect control pattern corresponding to is set as a use pattern (step S842). On the other hand, when executing a selection effect (step S840; Yes), a selection effect (selection effect pattern) is determined (step S843), an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, The special stage effect selected in the process of step S820 (since it is determined in step S821 that the line effect is not to be executed, the “special stage line effect” is not executed in “S-P1” or “S-P3”. An effect control pattern corresponding to any one) or an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern determined in the process of step S843 is set as a use pattern (step S845).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the selection effect is not executed in the fluctuation in which the line effect is executed.

  In the third embodiment, when it is determined not to shift to the normal stage (Noyama stage) (step S770; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs special stage effect selection processing (step S771) shown in FIG. In step S850, any special stage effect including a line effect (any main notice effect pattern shown in FIG. 24B) is determined (step S850), and it is determined whether or not to execute the selected effect (step S850). Step S861, Step S863, Step S865). When the selected effect is not executed (step S870; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, or the special stage effect selected in the process of step S850. An effect control pattern corresponding to is set as a use pattern (step S872). On the other hand, when executing a selection effect (step S870; Yes), a selection effect (selection effect pattern) is determined (step S873), an effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, An effect control pattern corresponding to the special stage effect selected in the process of step S850 and an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect pattern determined in the process of step S873 are set as usage patterns (step S875).

  As described above, in the third embodiment, there is a case where the selection effect is executed in the variation in which the line effect is executed, but the effect output process in the first embodiment and the second embodiment (FIG. 30). In the third embodiment, in order to execute an effect output process (FIG. 35) including an interruption process (step S923) and a restart process (step S928, step S930), an operation related to the line effect (line effect) And the operation related to the selection effect (the button operation for the telop and the reception time thereof) do not overlap in time (FIGS. 37 and 38).

  39 to 42 are diagrams illustrating examples of the display operation in the image display device 5. Specifically, FIG. 39 is a display operation example in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), and shows a state where a line effect is performed in the normal stage (Noyama stage). Yes. FIG. 40 is a display operation example in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), and shows a state in which a serif effect is performed on a special stage (underwater stage). FIG. 41 is a display operation example in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), and a selection effect is performed on a special stage (underwater stage), and the normal stage (Noyama stage) is switched to. It represents the situation. FIG. 42 is a display operation example according to the third embodiment, and shows a state where a serif effect and a selection effect are performed on a special stage (underwater stage). In addition, in each figure of FIGS. 39-42, about a hold display, the display of this time display area, etc. are abbreviate | omitted. (A)-(f) of FIG. 39 etc. arrange | positions each scene in time series. An arrow “↓” in the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 39B or the like indicates that the decorative design is changing.

  (A) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“2”, “5”, “3”) are stopped and displayed in the normal stage (Noyama stage). FIG. 39B shows a scene where variable display is started. (C) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the words of one person as a dialogue director "Hello." Is displayed. (D) of FIG. 39 is a scene where a button for a line effect is displayed. It is assumed that the button has been pressed by the player. (E) of FIG. 39 is a scene in which the button display is erased by displaying the second line “but hot,” in response to the button being pressed. (F) of FIG. 39 is a scene where the fixed decorative symbols (“5”, “5”, “5”) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 39B is a scene from the start of fluctuation (0 seconds) to the display of the first user's line (when about 1 second has elapsed from the start of fluctuation) in the example of the time chart of FIG. FIG. 39C is an example of the time chart of FIG. 32B. After displaying the first line (about 1 second after the start of change) to button display (about 2 seconds after the start of change). It is the previous scene. (D) of FIG. 39 is a scene in the example of the time chart of FIG. 32 (B) after the button is displayed (when about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change) to before the button is pressed (when about 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change). is there. (E) in FIG. 39 shows, in the example of the time chart in FIG. 32 (B), after the button is pressed (about 3 seconds from the start of the change) to the first and second person's lines are erased (about 6 from the start of the change). This is the previous scene.

  FIG. 40 (a) shows a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“3”, “1”, “7”) are stopped and displayed on the special stage (underwater stage). FIG. 40B shows a scene where variable display is started. (C) of FIG. 40 is a scene where the first line “is found?” Is displayed as a line production. (D) of FIG. 40 is a scene where a button for a dialogue effect is displayed. It is assumed that the button has been pressed by the player. (E) of FIG. 40 is a scene in which the button display is erased by displaying the second line “...” In response to pressing of the button. (F) of FIG. 40 is a scene where the fixed decorative symbols (“2”, “6”, “6”) are stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 40B is a scene from the start of the change (0 seconds) to the display of the first person's lines (when about 1 second has elapsed since the start of the change) in the example of the time chart of FIG. FIG. 40 (c) shows an example of the time chart of FIG. 32 (B), after displaying the first dialog (when about 1 second has elapsed since the start of fluctuation) to button display (when about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation). It is the previous scene. FIG. 40D is a scene in the example of the time chart of FIG. 32B, after the button is displayed (when about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change) to before the button is pressed (when about 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the change). is there. FIG. 40E is an example of the time chart of FIG. 32B. After the button is pressed (after about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change) to the first and second lines, the display of the lines is deleted (about 6 from the start of the change). This is the previous scene.

  FIG. 41 (a) shows a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“4”, “4”, “8”) are stopped and displayed on the special stage (underwater stage). FIG. 41B shows a scene where variable display is started. (C) of FIG. 41 is a scene in which a telop “When the button is pressed, the stage changes!” Is displayed as a selection effect. It is assumed that the button has been pressed by the player. (D) of FIG. 41 is a scene where the fixed decorative symbols (“1”, “8”, “2”) are stopped and displayed. 41 (e) to 41 (f) are scenes in which variable display is started and a normal stage transition effect is performed. That is, in (e) of FIG. 41, the message “Stage shift!” Is displayed as the normal stage transition effect, and in (f) of FIG. It is a scene that has been moved to the stage.

  FIG. 41B is a scene from the start of change (0 seconds) to the start of telop display (approximately 1 second after the start of change) in the example of the time chart of FIG. FIG. 41 (c) shows, in the example of the time chart of FIG. 32 (B), after the start of the telop display (when about 1 second has elapsed from the start of fluctuation) to after the button is pressed (when about 3.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of fluctuation). It is the previous scene. 41 (e) and 41 (f) are scenes from the start of change to the end of change (time chart is not shown). 41 (e), a normal stage transition effect is determined (step S781 in FIG. 25), and the special stage effect selection process (step S771) is not performed. Not executed.

  FIG. 42 (a) shows a scene where the fixed decorative symbols (“3”, “5”, “2”) are stopped and displayed on the special stage (underwater stage). FIG. 42B shows a scene where variable display is started. (C) of FIG. 42 is a scene in which the first person's line “Where are you going?” Is displayed as the line effect, and the telop “When the button is pressed, the stage changes!” Is displayed as the line effect. (D) of FIG. 42 is a scene in which a button for a dialogue effect is displayed and the telop display is deleted. It is assumed that the button has been pressed by the player. In (e) of FIG. 39, when the button is pressed, the second line “Usual Tokoro” is displayed, the button display is erased, and the telop “When the button is pressed, the stage changes!” Is displayed again. It is a scene. (F) of FIG. 42 is a scene in which the fixed decorative symbols (“8”, “2”, “1”) are stopped and displayed. When the button is pressed in (e) of FIG. 42, after the (f) of FIG. 42, as shown in (e) and (f) of FIG. ) To the normal stage (Noyama stage).

  FIG. 42B is an example of the time chart of FIG. 37A, from the start of fluctuation (0 seconds) to the start of the telop display and the display of the first dialog (about 1 second after the start of fluctuation). It is a scene. FIG. 42 (c) shows an example of the time chart of FIG. 37 (A), after displaying the first dialog (when about 1 second has elapsed since the start of change) to button display (when about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of change). It is the previous scene. FIG. 42 (d) shows a scene in the example of the time chart of FIG. 37 (A), after the button is displayed (when about 2 seconds have elapsed since the start of change) to before the button is pressed (when about 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of change). is there. FIG. 42 (e) shows an example of the time chart in FIG. 37 (A), after the button is pressed (about 3 seconds after the start of change) to before the end of the telop display (about 5 seconds after the start of change). It is a scene.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can be identified, and displays display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols). Identification that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination) is derived to a variable display means that derives a symbol etc.) A gaming machine that is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a plurality of types of rendering modes (for example, Noyama stage rendering mode, underwater stage rendering mode, etc.) The effect execution means (for example, variable display start waiting process in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), a variable display effect process (step S172), a waiting process per special figure (step S173), etc.) and the effect execution means produce an effect in one effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode). When being executed, a switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the one effect mode to another effect (for example, the Noyama stage effect) is enabled. Switching setting means for setting (for example, an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S813 in FIG. 28 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S815 in FIG. 28). Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, a display of the second person after the operation is performed, etc.) based on the same operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) ) To perform operation effects (for example, speech effects) (for example, normal stage effect selection processing in step S741 in FIG. 25, or special stage effect selection in step S771 in FIGS. 25 and 28) The operation effect execution means restricts performing the operation effect in variable display in which the effect is executed in the one effect mode (for example, the underwater stage effect mode, etc.). As shown in step S813, step S814, and step S815 of FIG. 28, the selection effect is executed in the underwater stage. If you do n’t want to run the line production).

  According to the above configuration, when the selection effect is executed in the underwater stage, the line effect in which the operation action to the push button 31B is performed is restricted, and thus the background shift unintended by the player can be prevented. That is, for example, an operation performed as a response to the speech effect is treated as a switching operation, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage.

  In the first embodiment, the operation effect executing means performs the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) in the variable display in which the effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the effect mode of the underwater stage). An effect selected from other than the above (for example, a step-up effect or the like by lottery) is performed. In other words, the operation effect execution means does not select the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) in the variable display in which the effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect). I am doing so.

  According to the said structure, execution of an operation effect can be restrict | limited suitably.

  In the description of the first embodiment described above, when the selection effect is executed in the underwater stage (step S810; Yes), the execution of the speech effect is restricted (step S814, step S815), and the selection effect is executed. If not (step S810; Yes), the execution of the line effect is not restricted (steps S811, S812), but the underwater stage may or may not execute the selection effect (ie, Regardless of whether the selection effect is executed or not, the execution of the speech effect may be limited (for example, an effect other than the serif effect (step-up effect) may be executed by lottery). Specifically, for example, in the flowchart of FIG. 28, the processing content of step S811 may be the same as the processing content of step S814, and the processing content of step S812 may be the same as the processing content of step S815. Further, in the underwater stage, no operation system effects other than the serif effects may be performed regardless of whether or not the selection effects are executed (the same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment). Will be described later). In other words, a gaming machine in which an operation system effect such as a speech effect can be executed in a certain stage (for example, a normal stage), and an operation system effect such as a speech effect is executed in another stage (for example, a special stage). A gaming machine or the like that restricts (restricts when performing a selection effect or restricts whether or not to perform a selection effect) also solves the problems described at the beginning (that is, included in the present invention). ) In other words, a gaming machine having a switching operation and an operation system effect as functions and provided with the above-described restrictions solves the problems described at the beginning.

  In the description of the first embodiment described above, as described above, the operation effect execution means performs variable display in which the effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode). The operation effect (for example, a speech effect) is not selected, but may be selected or not selected. In other words, the operation effect executing means selects the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) as an effect to be performed in a variable display in which the effect is executed in the one effect mode (for example, an effect mode of an underwater stage). Even in such a case, the operation effect may not be performed.

  That is, in the description of the first embodiment described above, any of the effects shown in FIG. 24C (main notice effect patterns “S-P1” and “S-P3”) is selected in the process of step S814 in FIG. However, for example, in the process of step S814 in FIG. 28, any one of the effects in FIG. 24B (main notice effect patterns “S-P1”, “S-P2”, “S-P3”, “S-P4”) When the line effect (the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” or “S-P4”) is selected, the line effect may not be executed. When the main notice effect pattern “S-P2” is selected in the process of step S814, the effect control pattern is set in step S815 (the main control pattern is set as the main notice effect pattern “S-P1” is selected). An effect control pattern that does not execute the notice effect may be set). When the main notice effect pattern “S-P4” is selected in the process of step S814, the effect control pattern is set (step S815) in the same manner as when the main notice effect pattern “S-P3” is selected (step S815). An effect control pattern that executes an up effect may be set).

  According to the said structure, execution of an operation effect can be restrict | limited suitably.

  In the first embodiment, the operation effect executing means performs the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) in the variable display in which the effect is executed in the first effect mode (for example, the effect mode of the underwater stage). It may also be possible to limit the performance different from that. For example, when executing a selection effect in the underwater stage, it may be possible to limit the effect different from the operation effect, and the operation is performed regardless of whether the selection effect is executed in the underwater stage. It may also be possible to limit the performance different from the performance.

  Note that “different effects” include operation system effects other than the serif effects, effects such as the above-described step-up effects (non-operation effect), and the like. For operation system effects other than serif effects, effects (such as buttons, operation rods, etc.) that operate in the same manner as selection effects and serif effects (for example, buttons, operation sticks, etc.) but with different operation modes (long press, repeated hits, etc.) For example), a selection effect or a serif effect, and an operation with the same operating mode (for example, pressing the left button or right button to select a treasure box, a card, a course, etc.) Production). In other words, for example, the same button as the button that is pressed when moving to the stage, in addition to the line effect that is pressed in the same operation mode as when moving to the stage (for example, normal pressing that is not long press or continuous hitting, etc.) A button that is pressed when moving to the stage, or a button that is pressed when moving to the stage. Different buttons (for example, the left button, middle button, and right button are arranged side by side on the upper plate. When pressing the middle button for stage transition and speech production, the left button is different from the middle button. Button or right button) in the same or different mode of operation (for example, normal press, long press, continuous hit, etc.) Execution of production may also be limited. It should be noted that the operation system effects other than the serif effects may include effects that differ from the selected effects and the serif effects in the members and the operation modes that are operated. Specific examples of operation system effects other than serif effects indicate that one option is selected by pressing a button from a plurality of effect options (reach or advance notice), and the degree of expectation is indicated by pressing the button after reaching reach. Notifications (such as producing line effects on reach lines or productions that become pseudo-reams from reach), and information on the progress of games (such as notifications, super reach, stage types and expectations), etc. by pressing buttons This is an effect that explains the content (such as a character). The same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation.

  In the first embodiment, it is indicated in the display area that the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed (for example, the telop in FIG. 41C). Effective setting notification means (for example, an effect control pattern (an effect control pattern including information related to the display of a telop)) corresponding to the selected effect pattern is notified in a predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in FIG. 41C). The effect executing means includes a display effect (for example, an effect by a decorative pattern, a lively event) executed in the predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in (c) of FIG. 41). It may be possible to limit the performance). For example, when telop display is not performed, a character or the like to be displayed on a decorative design or the like is always displayed (for example, moved to the left or right) at the bottom of the display area (or by lottery), while (c) in FIG. ), When the telop display is performed, the character may not be allowed to appear (or the lottery probability that the character is displayed is lower than that when the telop display is performed). Note that the position of the telop display may not be the lower part in the display area (for example, it may be the upper part of the display area). In a mode in which the position of the telop display is set to the upper part in the display area, when the telop display is not performed, the flower, leaf, snow, light, bills (usually from the upper part in the display area) are always (or by lottery). , Osamu), fans, aura, etc., pour down (drop), while when displaying the telop on the top, flowers, leaves, snow, light, bills (Oda, Osamu), fans, aura, etc. There may be no pour, and the amount of pouring may be reduced (or the lottery probability that pours will be lowered compared with the case of displaying a telop or the lottery probability that pours less is increased. May be good).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the reception status of the switching operation from becoming difficult to understand.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can be identified, and displays the display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols). Identification that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination) is derived to a variable display means that derives a symbol etc.) A gaming machine that is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a plurality of types of rendering modes (for example, Noyama stage rendering mode, underwater stage rendering mode, etc.) The effect execution means (for example, variable display start waiting process in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), a variable display effect process (step S172), a waiting process per special figure (step S173), etc.) and the effect execution means produce an effect in one effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode). When being executed, a switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the one effect mode to another effect (for example, the Noyama stage effect) is enabled. Change setting means for setting (for example, an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S843 in FIG. 33 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S845 in FIG. 34). Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, a display of the second person after the operation is performed, etc.) based on the same operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) ) To perform operation effects (for example, speech effects) (for example, normal stage effect selection processing in step S741 in FIG. 25, or special stage effect selection in step S771 in FIGS. 25 and 33) The switching setting means includes a setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) in the variable display where the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) is performed. (For example, as shown in step S822 in FIG. 33, when the line effect is performed, the selection effect is not executed. doing).

  According to the above configuration, when a line effect is performed in which an operation act on the push button 31B is performed, the selection effect is limited, and thus background transition unintended by the player can be prevented. That is, for example, an operation performed as a response to the speech effect is treated as a switching operation, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage.

  In the second embodiment, the switching setting unit is a switching operation setting determining unit (for example, a selection) that determines whether or not to perform a setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B). 33. The switching operation setting determining means includes a variable in which the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) is performed, including lottery of whether or not to execute the effect, the processes of step S830, step S832, and step S834 in FIG. In the display, it is not determined whether or not the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is to be performed (for example, as shown in FIG. When it is performed, the processing of step S830, step S832, and step S834 is not executed).

  According to the above configuration, the control load can be reduced.

  In the second embodiment, the switching setting unit (eg, a switching operation setting determining unit (for example, determining whether to perform setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B)) is performed. , Whether or not to execute the selection effect, the processing in step S830, step S832, and step S834 in FIG. 33), and the switch setting means is variable in which the operation effect (for example, a serif effect or the like) is performed. In the display, when it is determined that the setting for enabling the switching operation is performed by the switching operation setting determining means, the switching operation may be invalidated.

  That is, in the description of the second embodiment described above, when the line effect is not executed (step S821 in FIG. 33; No), whether or not the selection effect is executed is selected (for example, step S830 in FIG. 33, When the line effect is not executed (step S821 in FIG. 33; Yes), whether or not the selection effect is executed is not determined, but the line effect is executed. In addition, if the selection effect is to be executed by lottery, and the fact that the selection effect is to be executed is selected, the lottery result may be ignored. May be). In other words, after the fact that the selection effect is to be executed is determined, it is determined whether or not the speech effect is executed. When it is determined that the speech effect is executed, the selection effect may not be executed (for example, As in step S842, an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect may not be set.

  According to the said structure, the setting of the reception time with respect to switching operation can be restrict | limited suitably.

  In the second embodiment, the switching setting unit restricts the setting for enabling the switching operation even in variable display where an effect different from the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed. May be.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation.

  In the second embodiment, the fact that the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed (for example, the telop in FIG. 41C) is displayed in the display area. Effective setting notification means (for example, an effect control pattern (an effect control pattern including information related to the display of a telop)) corresponding to the selected effect pattern is notified in a predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in FIG. 41C). 33), and the effect execution means performs a display effect (for example, an effect by a decorative pattern) executed in the predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in (c) of FIG. 41). , Etc. may be restricted. A specific example is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the reception status of the switching operation from becoming difficult to understand.

  In the second embodiment, the valid setting notification unit may limit the notification when the display effect is performed in the predetermined area. According to the said structure, it can prevent that the said display effect in a predetermined area becomes difficult to understand.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can identify each of them, and displays the display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols). Identification that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination) is derived to a variable display means that derives a symbol etc.) A gaming machine that is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a plurality of types of rendering modes (for example, Noyama stage rendering mode, underwater stage rendering mode, etc.) The effect execution means (for example, variable display start waiting process in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting process (step S171), a variable display effect process (step S172), a waiting process per special figure (step S173), etc.) and the effect execution means produce an effect in one effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode). When being executed, a switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the one effect mode to another effect (for example, the Noyama stage effect) is enabled. Switching setting means for setting (for example, an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S873 in FIG. 34 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S875 in FIG. 34). Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, a display of the second person after the operation is performed, etc.) based on the same operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) ) To perform operation effects (for example, speech effects) (for example, normal stage effect selection processing in step S741 in FIG. 25, or special stage effect selection in step S771 in FIGS. 25 and 34) In the variable display in which the operation effect (for example, speech effect) is performed, at least the period during which the operation effect executing unit accepts the operation (for example, FIG. 37, FIG. 38, etc.). The button effective period of the dialogue production shown is the switching operation (for example, switching from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage, (For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), by the interruption process (step S923) of FIG. 35 and FIG. From about 2 seconds to 1 second after about 3 seconds), the button is not valid for telop display. Also, as in the example shown in FIGS. 37 (B), 38 (A), and 38 (B), the button effective period of the dialogue effect is not the button effective period of the telop display).

  According to the above configuration, when a line effect is performed in which an operation act on the push button 31B is performed, the selection effect is limited, and thus background transition unintended by the player can be prevented. That is, for example, an operation performed as a response to the speech effect is treated as a switching operation, and it is possible to prevent unintentional transition from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage.

  In the third embodiment, the switching setting unit is configured to perform the switching operation (for example, the button effective period of the line effect shown in FIGS. 37, 38, etc.) during which the operation effect executing unit accepts the operation (for example, When switching from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage, such as an operation action on the push button 31B, is invalidated, the switching operation is subsequently validated (for example, the resuming process in FIGS. 35 and 36 (step S928, step S928). S930), for example, as shown in FIG. 37A, after the button effective period of the dialogue effect (after about 2 seconds from the start of the change to about 1 second after about 3 seconds), the button effective period of the telop display In addition, as in the example shown in FIGS. 37 (B), 38 (A), and 38 (B), the telop display button is enabled. To re-set between).

  According to the said structure, a player's convenience can be improved.

  In the third embodiment, the switching setting unit is configured to switch the switching operation (for example, from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage) after a predetermined time elapses after the operation effect executing unit receives the operation (for example, an operation action on the speech effect). (For example, in FIG. 38 (A) and FIG. 38 (B), the timing of the operation action with respect to the line production (after about 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation)) The button valid period is reset (validated) after late timing (after about 4 seconds from the start of fluctuation).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 37 (A) and 37 (B), the button valid period of the telop display is reset (valid) at the timing when the operation action is performed on the speech production (after about 3 seconds have elapsed from the start of the change). However, the button valid period of the telop display may be reset after the elapse of a predetermined time after the operation action on the speech effect. That is, the button valid period of the telop display may be reset after providing an interval after the operation action for the line effect. Thereby, for example, an unintended background shift due to the push button 31B being repeatedly hit as a response to the serif effect can be prevented. That is, it is possible to prevent a stage shift from being performed without the player's intention when operated late.

  In the third embodiment, the switching setting means limits the setting for enabling the switching operation even in variable display in which an effect different from the switching operation (for example, an act of operating the push button 31B) is performed. May be.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation.

  In the third embodiment, it is indicated in the display area that the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, an operation action on the push button 31B) is performed (for example, the telop in FIG. 41C). Effective setting notification means (for example, an effect control pattern (an effect control pattern including information related to the display of a telop)) corresponding to the selected effect pattern is notified in a predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in FIG. 41C). 34 is set, and the effect executing means is a display effect (for example, an effect by a decorative pattern) executed in the predetermined area (for example, the lower part as in (c) of FIG. 41). , Etc. may be restricted. A specific example is the same as that described in the first embodiment.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the reception status of the switching operation from becoming difficult to understand.

  In the third embodiment, the valid setting notification unit may limit the notification when the display effect is performed in the predetermined area. According to the said structure, it can prevent that the said display effect in a predetermined area becomes difficult to understand.

  Hereinafter, the first to third embodiments will be further described.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can be identified, and displays the display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols, etc.) ) Is displayed in a variable display means for deriving a specific display state (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination, etc.) (E.g., a big hit gaming state) that is controlled by a plurality of times in any one of a plurality of types of production modes (e.g., Noyama stage production mode, underwater stage production mode, etc.). Production execution means capable of producing production over variable display (for example, variable display start waiting processing in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting processing (step S) 71), production process during variable display (step S172), waiting process per special figure (step S173), and the like, and the production is performed in one production mode (for example, the stage mode of the underwater stage) by the production execution means. The setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, the act of operating the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the first effect mode to the effect of another mode (for example, the Noyama stage) Switching setting means (for example, an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S813 in FIG. 28 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S815 in FIG. 28). Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the same as the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B or a display of the second person after the operation is performed) based on the operation (for example, the user act on the push button 31B). Operation effect execution means (for example, a normal stage effect selection process in step S741 in FIG. 25, a special stage effect selection process in step S771 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 28, etc.) for performing an operation effect (for example, a speech effect) to be executed. The operation effect executing means restricts the operation effect from being performed in variable display in which the effect is executed in the one effect mode (for example, the effect mode of the underwater stage) (for example, FIG. As shown in step S813, step S814, and step S815 of 28, when the selection effect is executed in the underwater stage, The switching setting means sets the ratio for setting the switching operation to be valid (for example, the ratio for executing the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set in the rendering). (For example, in the special stage effect selection process (step S771) in FIG. 28), when the value of the special stage counter is less than the second threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A The selection effect execution lottery B and the selection effect execution lottery C) are not executed, and when the value of the special stage counter is not less than the second threshold value and less than the third threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery A ( Step S805) is executed, and when the value of the special stage counter is not less than the third threshold value and less than the fourth threshold value, selection effect execution lottery B (Step S803) is executed, When the value of the stage counter is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold value is executing the selection effect execution lottery C (step S801). It should be noted that the determination ratio of execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution lottery A (for example, 1/5)> the determination ratio of execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution lottery B (for example, 1/15)> the selection effect execution lottery. The determination ratio (for example, 1/100, etc.) that selection effect is executed by C). That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment performs the setting for enabling the switching operation after the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage) (for example, the performance). The ratio of execution of the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set is changed in accordance with the number of changes after the transition (value of the special stage counter).

  As described above, the switching setting means of the first embodiment (the same applies to the switching setting means of the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later), the ratio for performing the setting for enabling the switching operation. Although changed according to the state, the state includes various matters relating to the gaming machine. For example, examples of the “state” include the above-described game progress status (for example, the number of changes), the normal state / probability change state, and whether or not an event has occurred. Some events are, for example, winning (for example, big hit, small win), occurrence of an error (for example, there was an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 in the abnormality diagnosis described above), Initialization of display and predetermined information (for example, a flag or counter stored in the data storage area for effect control 190) (for example, a flag or a counter is set to a default value when an error occurs or a demonstration screen is displayed) In this case, change to the default value).

  Note that the switching setting means of the first embodiment (the same applies to the switching setting means of the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later), the ratio of setting for enabling the switching operation depends on the state. Although described as changing, the switching setting means of the first embodiment (the same applies to the switching setting means of the second embodiment and the third embodiment described later) is the ratio at which the setting for enabling the switching operation is performed. May not be changed depending on the state.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can be identified, and displays the display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols, etc.) ) Is displayed in a variable display means for deriving a specific display state (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination, etc.) (E.g., a big hit gaming state) that is controlled by a plurality of times in any one of a plurality of types of production modes (e.g., Noyama stage production mode, underwater stage production mode, etc.). Production execution means capable of producing production over variable display (for example, variable display start waiting processing in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting processing (step S) 71), production process during variable display (step S172), waiting process per special figure (step S173), and the like, and the production is performed in one production mode (for example, the stage mode of the underwater stage) by the production execution means. The setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, the act of operating the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the first effect mode to the effect of another mode (for example, the Noyama stage) Switching setting means (for example, an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S843 in FIG. 33 is set as a use pattern (for example, step S845 in FIG. 34). Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the same as the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B or a display of the second person after the operation is performed) based on the operation (for example, the user act on the push button 31B). Operation effect executing means (for example, a normal stage effect selection process in step S741 in FIG. 25, a special stage effect selection process in step S771 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 33), etc. ), And the switching setting means restricts the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, the act of operating the push button 31B) in the variable display where the operation effect (for example, the serif effect or the like) is performed. (For example, as shown in step S822 of FIG. 33, when the line effect is performed, the selection effect is not executed) The switching setting means changes a ratio for performing the setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, a ratio for executing the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set in the effect) according to the state (for example, In the special stage effect selection process (step S771) in FIG. 33, when the value of the special stage counter is less than the second threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, selection effect execution lottery B, selection effect) The selection effect is not executed without performing the execution lottery C), and when the value of the special stage counter is greater than or equal to the second threshold value and less than the third threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery A (step S835) is executed and the special stage is performed. When the counter value is not less than the third threshold value and less than the fourth threshold value, selection effect execution lottery B (step S833) is executed, and the value of the special stage counter is not less than the fourth threshold value. It is performing a selective effect execution lottery C (step S831) when it is. It should be noted that the determination ratio of execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution lottery A (for example, 1/5)> the determination ratio of execution of the selection effect by the selection effect execution lottery B (for example, 1/15)> the selection effect execution lottery. The determination ratio (for example, 1/100, etc.) that selection effect is executed by C). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment performs the setting for enabling the switching operation after the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage) (for example, the performance). The ratio of execution of the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set is changed in accordance with the number of changes after the transition (value of the special stage counter).

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols, special symbols, etc.) that can identify each of them, and display results (for example, fixed decorative symbols, fixed special symbols, etc.) ) Is displayed in a variable display means for deriving a specific display state (for example, “big hit” with a fixed special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a big hit combination, etc.) (E.g., a big hit gaming state) that is controlled by a plurality of times in any one of a plurality of types of production modes (e.g., Noyama stage production mode, underwater stage production mode, etc.). Production execution means capable of producing production over variable display (for example, variable display start waiting processing in FIG. 21 (step S170), variable display start setting processing (step S) 71), production process during variable display (step S172), waiting process per special figure (step S173), and the like, and the production is performed in one production mode (for example, the stage mode of the underwater stage) by the production execution means. The setting for enabling the switching operation (for example, the act of operating the push button 31B, etc.) for switching the effect of the first effect mode to the effect of another mode (for example, the Noyama stage) 34 is set as a usage pattern (for example, step S875 in FIG. 34), which is used as an effect control pattern including an effect control pattern corresponding to the selected effect determined in step S873 in FIG. Special stage effect selection processing (step S771) and the like, and the effect execution means is the same as the switching operation. (For example, a button display for prompting the user to operate the push button 31B or a display of the second person after the operation is performed) based on the operation (for example, the user act on the push button 31B). Operation effect execution means (for example, a normal stage effect selection process in step S741 in FIG. 25, a special stage effect selection process in step S771 in FIG. 25 and FIG. 34), etc. ), And the switch setting means is a variable display in which the operation effect (for example, a serif effect) is performed, and at least a period during which the operation effect execution means accepts the operation (for example, as shown in FIGS. 37, 38, etc.) The button effective period of the dialogue production is the push operation (for example, switching from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage) For example, as shown in FIG. 37 (A), the button effective period (from the start of the change) of the dialogue effect is displayed by disabling the operation action on the button 31B (for example, as shown in FIG. The telop display button is not valid for about 2 seconds to 1 second after about 3 seconds. Also, as in the example shown in FIGS. 37B, 38A, and 38B, the button effective period of the dialogue effect is not the button effective period of the telop display), and the switching setting means Changes the ratio for setting the switching operation to be valid (for example, the ratio for executing the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set in the effect) according to the state (for example, FIG. 34). In the special stage effect selection process (step S771), when the value of the special stage counter is less than the second threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, selection effect execution lottery B, selection effect execution lottery C). If the value of the special stage counter is not less than the second threshold value and less than the third threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery A (step S865) is executed. When the value of the stage counter is not less than the third threshold value and less than the fourth threshold value, the selection effect execution lottery B (step S863) is executed, and when the value of the special stage counter is not less than the fourth threshold value, the selection effect execution is executed. The lottery C (step S861) is being executed, and the determination ratio of selection effect execution by the selection effect execution lottery A (for example, 1/5)> the determination ratio of selection effect execution by the selection effect execution lottery B ( For example, 1/15)> selection effect execution determination ratio by selection effect execution lottery C (for example, 1/100, etc.). In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the third embodiment is configured to make the setting for enabling the switching operation after the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage) (for example, the performance). The ratio of execution of the selection effect in which the switching operation reception time is set is changed in accordance with the number of changes after the transition (value of the special stage counter).

  Since the determination ratio of the main notice effect pattern at the special stage may be FIG. 24C instead of FIG. 24B (because the line effect may be limited), the line at the special stage The selection ratio of the dialogue production when the production is not limited may be higher than the selection proportion of the dialogue production in the normal stage. For example, in FIGS. 24A and 24B, “e12” + “e14” <“e22” + “e24” may be set, or “e12” <“e22” may be set.

  Further, in order to give more notices to be executed than notices to be canceled (restricted), the selection ratio of the step-up effect (non-operation effect) is greater in the case of 24 (B) than in FIG. May be high. In FIGS. 24A and 24B, “e13” + “e14” <“e23” + “e24” may be set, or “e13” <“e23” may be set.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) is a ratio at which the setting for enabling the switching operation is performed (for example, the switching operation reception time is set in the effect). The ratio of execution of the selected effect is changed according to the number of changes (the value of the special stage counter) after the transition to the one effect mode (for example, the effect mode of the underwater stage). You may change according to the frequency | count which performed the setting which validates operation.

  For example, after the transition to the underwater stage, until the setting for enabling the switching operation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), the ratio for performing the switching operation is set to the first ratio (for example, 1 / 10), and after that (that is, when the setting for enabling the switching operation is performed a predetermined number of times, but there is no switching operation), the ratio of the setting for enabling the switching operation is set to the first It is good also as a 2nd ratio (for example, 1/30 etc.) lower than a ratio (for example, 1/10 etc.).

  This can prevent the player from feeling troublesome.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) can perform the switching operation (for example, an operation action to the push button 31B to switch from the underwater stage to the Noyama stage). Even if not, forced switching determination means (for example, the normal stage transition lottery (see FIG. 27) for determining whether or not the effect of the one effect mode is switched to the effect of another mode (for example, the Noyama stage effect mode, etc.). Step S764) and the like.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the forced switching determination means shifts to the first effect mode (for example, the effect mode of the underwater stage). When the number of subsequent fluctuations is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of times, it is determined whether or not the effect of the one effect mode is switched to the effect of another mode (for example, the Noyama stage mode) (for example, a special stage) When the counter value is equal to or greater than the fourth threshold (step S763; Yes), the normal stage transition lottery (step S764) in FIG. 27 is executed).

  This can prevent the player from feeling troublesome.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) can produce an effect according to the above-described one effect mode (for example, an underwater stage effect mode) in another mode (for example, a Noyama stage). The switching operation (for example, the act of operating the push button 31B, etc.) is accepted as a selection for switching to the production mode, etc., but instead of the above, the production of the first production mode is transferred to another mode. Selection of the first operation (for example, when one button is arranged on the upper plate, when the button is pressed and when the left button and the right button are arranged side by side on the upper plate) As well as the second operation (for example, when one button is arranged on the upper plate) as a selection not to shift the production of the first production mode to the other mode. Button through Pressing or (pressed other than the long press or continuous hits), the left button on the upper tray, such as pressing the right button of the case are disposed side by side two buttons right button) may be accepted.

  In the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) accepts the second operation in addition to the first operation, the second operation is accepted. Depending on the number of times, the ratio for performing the setting for enabling the first operation and the second operation may be changed. For example, until the second operation is accepted (when the number of times the second operation is accepted after shifting to the underwater stage is 0), the first operation and the second operation are set to be valid. After the second operation is accepted (when the number of times of accepting the second operation after shifting to the underwater stage is one or more times) ) Is a second ratio (for example, 1/50, etc.) that is lower than the first ratio (for example, 1/5, etc.) for performing the setting for enabling the first operation and the second operation. It is good.

  Thereby, the production effect by another aspect (for example, the production effect by a Noyama stage, etc.) can be heightened.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (same for the second and third embodiments) accepts the second operation in addition to the first operation, the second operation is performed. The determination by the forced switching determination unit may be limited according to the number of times received. For example, the forced switching determination unit does not determine whether or not to switch until the second operation is received a predetermined number of times (one or two times) or a predetermined number of times (one or two times). More than once), the determination ratio of switching may be made lower than after receiving.

  In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), after the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage), the first performance mode is performed. A prohibition period during which selection (lottery) is not performed to shift from another mode (for example, Noyama stage direction) to another mode (for example, Noyama stage) is set. (For example, in the special stage effect selection process (step S771) in FIGS. 28, 34, and 34), the value of the special stage counter is less than the second threshold value. When (Step S804; No, Step S834; No, Step S864; No), the selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery A, selection effect execution lottery B, selection effect actual Although selective effect without drawing C) is set to run continuously), the prohibition period is not necessarily set. Similarly, after shifting to another mode (for example, Noyama stage effect mode), the other effect (for example, Noyama stage effect mode) is changed to the first effect mode (for example, underwater stage effect mode). A prohibition period during which selection (lottery) for transition is not performed is set, so that the transition to the first performance mode (for example, the performance mode of the underwater stage) is not performed (for example, the special stage transition determination in FIG. 26). In the process (step S730), when the value of the normal stage counter is less than the first threshold (step S731; No), the special stage transition lottery (step S732) is not performed), but the prohibition period is It does not necessarily have to be set.

  In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), a forbidden period immediately after the stage transition (while the value of the special stage counter is less than the second threshold, While the value of the normal stage counter is less than the first threshold, etc.) is set, a prohibition period may be set in a period other than the above.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) sets a prohibition period in the period immediately after the stage transition, a selection effect is provided after the first prohibition period. And when there is no switching operation in the selection effect, a second prohibition period longer than the first prohibition period may be set. The prohibition period may include not only a period in which selection (lottery) is not performed but also a period in which selection (lottery) is difficult to perform. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments) is in a first state in which the switching operation cannot be effectively set or is difficult to set (for example, eight times). After the control over the second state, it is possible to set the switching operation effectively or easily, and when the control is again made to the first state, a specific period (for example, eight times) longer than the predetermined period (for example, eight times) , 30 times, etc.).

  In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), when the count value of the normal stage counter is greater than or equal to the first threshold (step S731; Yes). , Whether or not to shift from the normal stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage (underwater stage) is selected (step S732), but when the specific variation pattern, the special stage (Noyama stage) to the special stage ( You may make it transfer to an underwater stage. For example, as the types of non-reach loss variation patterns, two types of normal variation (transition non-variation) patterns and transition variation patterns are prepared (the special figure variation time is the same). When a transition variation pattern is drawn in the normal stage (Noyama stage) (when a lottery is selected), the normal stage (Noyama stage) is shifted to a special stage (underwater stage). However, even if the transition stage is a normal stage but is a forbidden period or a special stage, even if a transition fluctuation pattern is drawn, it is handled as a normal fluctuation pattern so that it does not shift to a special stage.

  Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment has a selection effect execution lottery (a selection effect execution lottery C in step S801, a selection effect execution lottery B in step S803, and a selection effect execution lottery A in step S805) according to the variation pattern. ) May be performed. For example, when the variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (for example, a non-reach variation pattern (variation pattern “PA1-1”)), at least one of the selection effect execution lotteries A, B, and C is not performed. You may do it. In addition, for example, the ratio of “selection effect execution present” and “selection effect execution non-execution” in at least one of the selection effect execution lotteries A, B, and C is a change in a specific fluctuation pattern (for example, super reach β (loss)). The pattern “PA5-1”) may be different from when it is a variation pattern other than a specific variation pattern. Selection effect execution lottery (selection effect execution lottery C in step S831, selection effect execution lottery B in step S833, selection effect execution lottery A in step S835) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, or the third embodiment The same applies to the selection effect execution lottery (the selection effect execution lottery C in step S861, the selection effect execution lottery B in step S863, the selection effect execution lottery A in step S865) in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above.

  In the description of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the switching operation can be performed during a part of the variable display time (except for the limited time). The switching operation may be performed during the entire time during variable display (excluding the limited time). In other words, the switching operation may be performed between the start of change and the end of change except when restricted by a dialogue effect or the like. In addition, when the variable display is not being performed, for example, when the hold is interrupted and there is no change between the fluctuations when there is a hold (including the case where the demo screen is displayed), the switching operation can be performed. May be. Note that the demo screen may be made to know which stage is the stage before the transition to the demo screen. For example, a normal stage demo screen that transitions from the normal stage and a special stage demo screen that transitions from the special stage may be prepared, and any of the common demo screens that transition from the normal stage or the special stage Information (for example, an image, a wording, etc.) that indicates whether or not the stage has been moved may be displayed.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the stage transition and notification (display) of whether or not to transition may be performed as follows. .
(A) After the entry (transition) of the special stage (underwater stage), in the first period (for example, the 1st to 14th rotations), informing whether or not to shift to the normal stage in all the fluctuation patterns (For example, “Do you want to return to the Noyama stage?”). The lottery probability of “not notify” is 100%, and the lottery probability of “notify” is 0%.
(B) After the entry (transition) of the special stage (underwater stage), during the second period (for example, the 15th to 40th rotations), some fluctuation patterns (for example, some big hit fluctuation patterns, shortening) In most of the variation patterns (except the variation pattern), a lottery is performed to notify whether or not to shift to the normal stage (for example, “Do you want to return to the Noyama stage?”). At this time, the lottery probability of “not notify”> the lottery probability (other than 0%) of “notify”. For example, the lottery probability of “not notify” is about 70%, and the lottery probability of “notify” is about 30%. In addition, since a lottery is not performed in some variation patterns, the above notification is not performed.
(C) In a specific variation pattern (for example, the above-described transition variation pattern that is one of the non-reach loss variation patterns), the above-described notification may be always performed without performing the above-described lottery.
(D) After a specific super reach (losing) variation pattern, the special stage (underwater stage) may be shifted to the normal stage (Noyama stage) without performing the above-described lottery.
(E) In a specific super reach (losing) variation pattern, the above lottery is performed, but when it is determined that the above notification is performed, the special stage (underwater stage) is switched to the normal stage (Noyama) without performing the notification. Stage).
(F) After “small hit” in which the accuracy is disguised, it may be shifted to a specific production mode (latency suggestion stage) that suggests the possibility that the probability change is latent, In the embodiment, in the fluctuation pattern of “small hit”, the stage may be shifted from the special stage (underwater stage) to the latent suggestion stage.

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the special stage (underwater stage) and the normal stage (Noyama stage) seem to have different lots of pre-reading effects. It may be. For example, in the special stage (underwater stage), if there are three types of changes: hold change, chance, and look-ahead zone (background change), if you enter the look-ahead zone in the special stage (underwater stage), the look-ahead zone from the background of the underwater stage In the special stage (underwater stage), lottery other than the pre-read zone (holding change, chance chance) will be drawn or the pre-read zone will not be executed even if the pre-read zone is drawn. It may be.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the reach effect may be performed as follows.
(A) For example, the reach background A, B, C for the normal stage (Noyama stage) and the reach background D, F for the special stage (underwater stage) are prepared, and in the normal stage (Noyama stage), One of the reach backgrounds A, B, and C is selected for the reach variation pattern, and one of the reach backgrounds D and F is selected for the reach variation pattern in the special stage (underwater stage). May be.
(B) However, with respect to a specific reach variation pattern, the same reach background may be drawn in the normal stage (Noyama stage) and in the special stage (underwater stage). . For example, an effect with a high degree of jackpot expectation (for example, an effect of about 30% or more) is executed less frequently, and is therefore a normal stage (a Noyama stage) for a reach variation pattern with a high degree of jackpot expectation. Sometimes, the same reach background may be drawn by lots when the stage is a special stage (underwater stage).
(C) For the same reach fluctuation pattern, one of the reach backgrounds A, B, and C is drawn when the normal stage (Noyama stage) is selected, and the reach background D is selected when the stage is a special stage (underwater stage). , F may be selected by lottery. For example, with respect to the fluctuation pattern “PB3-X”, when the stage is a normal stage, one of the reach backgrounds A, B, and C is drawn at a ratio of one third, and when the stage is a special stage, either the reach background D or F is selected. May be drawn at a ratio of half each.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the first embodiment, when the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous, the execution of the main notice effect may be limited as follows.
(A) In the case of a quasi-continuous variation pattern, the execution of a main notice effect (for example, a speech effect) is limited in a specific variation in which a selection effect (telop display or the like) is performed among the variations related to the quasi-continuation. Also good.
For example, telop display or the like is performed at the first fluctuation (fluctuation at which the chance eye stops), and is performed at the second fluctuation (fluctuation at which the chance eye stops again) or the third fluctuation (change to reach). If not, the execution of the serif effect is limited in the first variation, but the execution of the serif effect may not be limited in the second and third variations.
(B) In addition, when it is set as the aspect which determines a notice effect separately about each of each fluctuation | variation which concerns on a pseudo | simulation series, in the case of the said (A), whether a selection effect is performed about the 1st fluctuation | variation. The notice effect is determined including whether or not to limit according to (whether or not it overlaps with the execution timing of the selected effect), and the second and third fluctuations are not considered whether or not the selected effect is executed. In addition, a notice effect may be determined.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the second embodiment, when the variation pattern is a pseudo-continuous pattern, the execution of the selection effect (setting of the switching operation reception time) may be limited as follows.
(A) In the case of a quasi-continuous variation pattern, the execution of the selection effect may be limited in a specific variation in which the main notice effect is performed among the variations related to the quasi-continuation. For example, if the line effect is performed in the first variation and not in the second variation or the third variation, the execution of the selection effect is restricted in the first variation, but the second and third variations In this case, the execution of the selection effect need not be restricted.
(B) In addition, when it is set as the aspect which determines the selection effect about each of each fluctuation | variation which concerns on a pseudo | simulation series, in the case of the said (A) example, whether a line effect is performed about the 1st fluctuation | variation. Depending on (whether or not it overlaps with the execution timing of the serif effect), the selected effect is determined including whether or not to limit, and the second and third fluctuations are not considered whether or not the serif effect is executed. Alternatively, the selection effect may be determined.

  In the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the telop notifies that the switching operation is possible. However, the player can perform the switching operation. As long as it can recognize the fact, it may be notified by means other than the telop display. Further, when the player recognizes that the switching operation is possible, the notification need not be made. Note that even if the player does not recognize that the switching operation is possible, the player may not be notified.

  Further, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second and third embodiments), the stage transition from the normal stage to the special stage is performed by lottery, and the stage transition from the special stage to the normal stage is a game. The stage transition from the normal stage to the special stage may be performed by the player's operation or lottery. Further, the stage transition from the special stage to the normal stage may be performed by either player operation or lottery.

  In the first embodiment (the second and third embodiments are the same), the normal stage is the Noyama stage and the special stage is the underwater stage. Is the player a normal stage? As long as it can recognize whether it is a special stage, any normal stage or any special stage may be used. Note that the names of the normal stage and the special stage are used to distinguish them from each other, and the special stage does not have to be special to the normal stage (something may be special).

  Further, in the first embodiment (the same applies to the second embodiment and the third embodiment), as a plurality of types of production modes, two types of production modes (normal stage (Noyama stage), special stage (underwater stage) Although the example of)) was demonstrated, three or more types may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types, stage A (for example, “past stage”, etc.), stage B (for example, “modern stage”, etc.), stage C (for example, “future stage”, etc.), or stage a ( For example, there are four types: “spring stage”, stage b (eg “summer stage”, etc.), stage c (eg “autumn stage” etc.), and stage d (eg “winter stage” etc.). Also good. Note that the stage switching pattern when there are three or more types of stages may be determined in advance (for example, in the case of four types of “spring stage”, “summer stage”, “autumn stage”, “winter stage” You may decide to move in the order of "Spring Stage"-> "Summer Stage"-> "Autumn Stage"-> "Winter Stage"-> "Spring Stage"-> "Past Stage", "Contemporary Stage", "Future Stage" In the case of the three types, “Contemporary stage” will move to either “Past stage” or “Future stage” by lottery, and “Past stage” or “Future stage” will always be “Contemporary stage”. You may decide to migrate).

  In the above embodiment, the change is started in order to notify the effect control microcomputer (effect control CPU 120) of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-ream. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is sometimes transmitted is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, presence / absence of a slip effect, etc. Is a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the so-called second stop, and the second command has reached a reach such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of a re-lottery effect. May be configured to transmit a command indicating the variation time and variation mode after the so-called second stop. In this case, the effect control microcomputer may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 100, the change time is notified by each of two commands, and the specific control mode executed at each timing is selected by the production control microcomputer. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a predetermined time elapses (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. However, the data need not necessarily be stored in a table format (for example, a structure, an array, etc.). For example, each of the special figure display results ("big hit" and "losing") is compared with a random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result so that the determination ratio shown in FIG. (Determined value) may be stored in the ROM 101 in the form of a table, but information for determining a special figure display result at a decision ratio as shown in FIG. The ROM 101 may store a mathematical expression or program that outputs any special figure display result when a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR1 is input. In addition, the data does not necessarily have to be stored together in the ROM 101. That is, the above-described structures, arrays, mathematical formulas, programs, and the like may be distributed (stored) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 101. In addition, it has been described that the ROM 121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. The data in the ROM 121 is the same as the data in the ROM 101.

  In the above description, the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal winning ball device 6B are disposed below the sorting device 200, but the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6D ( (Not shown) may be arranged. That is, the normal variable winning ball device 6D may be arranged at the position of the normal winning ball device 6B instead of the normal winning ball device 6B. Even if there is a navel prize (winning from the top not picked up by the movable wing piece) for the normal variable winning ball device 6C, an electric support prize (winning from the side picked up by the movable wing piece at the tilting position) is received. In the same manner, the second start condition is satisfied. Similarly, if the second start condition is satisfied for the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6D even if there is a navel win or an electric support win. Good. When the normal winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6D are arranged below the distribution device 200, the normal variable winning ball device 6C may not be arranged. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is not arranged, the passing gate 41 may be provided on the left side instead of the right side of the image display apparatus 5, or may be provided on both sides.

  In the above description, the sorting apparatus 200 is arranged, but the sorting apparatus 200 may not be arranged. For example, instead of the distribution device 200, the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal winning ball device 6B, a normal variable winning ball device 6E (not shown) may be disposed below the image display device 5. The first start condition may be satisfied when the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6E receives a navel prize, and the second start condition may be satisfied when an electric support prize is received. When the normal variable winning ball device 6E is arranged instead of the distribution device 200, the normal winning ball device 6A, and the normal winning ball device 6B, the normal variable winning ball device 6C may not be arranged. When the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6C is not arranged, the passing gate 41 may be provided on the left side instead of the right side of the image display apparatus 5, or may be provided on both sides.

  In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 makes a right turn in the high base state, but does not have to make a right turn as long as it is a way to benefit from electric support in the high base state. For example, when the normal variable winning ball device 6E is arranged below the image display device 5 without arranging the normal variable winning ball device 6C on the right side of the image display device 5, it is not always necessary to make a right hand. .

  In addition, when a non-probable big hit (third big hit) is made, a predetermined number of time reductions may be added.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a game ball is paid out as a prize to the player, and the player launches the paid out game ball (which may be a rental ball) into the game area to play the game. A game machine in which a player performs a predetermined operation after rotating each drum on which a plurality of kinds of symbols are arranged by inserting coins (game media), etc. When the game result (combination of symbols at the time of stoppage) becomes a specific game result (predetermined combination), the game consideration (the number of coins according to the combination of symbols at the time of stoppage) The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine (so-called pachislot machine) that pays out the game.

  In other words, in a pachislot machine with multiple stages, control is performed so that the stage switching operation (operation acceptance time) and the production based on the same operation as the stage switching operation do not overlap in time. As such, the present invention can be applied.

  In addition, a game score for use in a game is given by using the number of game values having a size specified by the record information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card, and the given game The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine using a score or a game score given by winning a game.

  That is, based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start area provided in the game area, variable display means is provided for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can each be identified and for deriving and displaying the display results. A gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined specific display result is derived and displayed on the display means, but when the gaming score is not zero, The game ball enclosed in the game is driven into the game area, the game is performed, the game score is subtracted according to the game ball being driven, and the game score is awarded according to the game ball winning in the winning area provided in the game area The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that adds the values. Such a gaming machine includes a gaming recording medium insertion slot for inserting a gaming recording medium in which information capable of specifying the magnitude of gaming value that can be used to add gaming scores, and a gaming recording You may provide the game recording medium processing means which reads the recording information currently recorded on the game recording medium inserted in the medium insertion port.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

1 ... Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frames 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 5H ... Start winning memory display area 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary winning ball device 6C ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8 ... Speaker 9 ... Lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A ... First start Port switch 22B ... Second start port switch 22C ... Third start port switch 23 ... Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputers 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123… Display control unit 200… Sorting device 201… Inlet 202… Sorting member 203… Left passage 204… Right passage 205… Left outlet 206… Right outlet

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that controls a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when a specific display result is derived by a variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them and deriving a display result,
An effect execution means capable of performing an effect over a plurality of variable displays in any of the effect modes of the plurality of types of effect modes;
A switch setting unit configured to enable a switching operation for switching the effect of the first effect mode to the effect of another mode when the effect is executed by the effect executing unit in the one effect mode; ,
The production execution means
An operation effect executing means for performing an operation effect for executing an effect based on the same operation as the switching operation;
The switching setting means includes
In the variable display in which the operation effect is performed, the switching operation is invalidated at least during a period in which the operation effect execution unit accepts the operation,
The switching setting means includes
A gaming machine, wherein a ratio for performing setting for enabling the switching operation is changed according to a state.